Yamaha HTR-6250 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-6250

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

HTR-6250

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold

with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications

not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,

granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Caution-ii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this

unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

.......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model)

.......................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model)

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the

same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are

incorrectly replaced.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by

STANDBY/ON. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Features.................................................................... 2

About this manual................................................... 3

Supplied accessories................................................ 3

Part names and functions....................................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Rear panel .................................................................. 5

Front panel display..................................................... 6

Remote control........................................................... 7

Quick start guide.....................................................8

Preparing remote control ....................................... 9

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9

Using the remote control............................................ 9

Connections ...........................................................10

Placing speakers....................................................... 10

Connecting speakers ................................................ 11

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13

Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14

Connecting other components ................................. 15

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 16

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 16

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 17

Connecting the power cable..................................... 17

Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 17

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening

room (YPAO) ....................................................18

Using Auto Setup..................................................... 18

When an error message is displayed during

measurement ........................................................ 20

When a warning message is displayed after

measurement ........................................................ 20

Playback.................................................................21

Basic procedure........................................................ 21

Using the SCENE function ...................................... 21

Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE).............. 22

Adjusting high/low frequency sound (tone control) 22

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 22

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 22

Using your headphones............................................ 22

Displaying input signal information ........................ 23

Changing information on the front panel display .... 23

Enjoy the sound field programs .......................... 24

Selecting sound field programs................................ 24

Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight

decoding mode) ................................................... 27

Enjoying sound field programs without surround

speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 27

Enjoy sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 27

FM/AM tuning ......................................................28

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency

tuning).................................................................. 28

Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset

tuning).................................................................. 28

Using iPod™ .......................................................... 30

Controlling iPod™................................................... 30

Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 32

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and

your Bluetooth component .................................. 32

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 32

Setting the option menu for each input source

(OPTION menu) ............................................... 33

OPTION menu items ............................................... 33

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

............................................................................ 36

Selecting a decoder used with a sound field program

............................................................................. 36

Setting sound field parameters................................. 36

Sound field parameters ............................................ 36

Operating various settings for this unit

(Setup menu) ..................................................... 38

Basic operation of the setup menu ........................... 39

Speaker Setup .......................................................... 39

Sound Setup ............................................................. 41

Function Setup ......................................................... 42

DSP Parameter ......................................................... 43

Memory Guard......................................................... 43

Controlling other components with the remote

control................................................................ 44

Setting remote control codes.................................... 44

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 44

Advanced setup..................................................... 45

Troubleshooting.................................................... 46

General..................................................................... 46

HDMI....................................................................... 49

Tuner (FM/AM) ....................................................... 49

Remote control......................................................... 50

iPod™ ...................................................................... 50

Bluetooth™.............................................................. 51

Auto Setup (YPAO)................................................. 51

Glossary ................................................................. 53

Sound field program information ....................... 55

Information on HDMI™...................................... 55

Specifications......................................................... 56

Index ...................................................................... 57

(at the end of this manual)

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

APPENDIX

List of remote control codes...................................i

2 En

INTRODUCTION

■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

• Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

• FRONT L/R: 90 W + 90 W

• CENTER: 90 W

• SURROUND L/R: 90 W + 90 W

• SURROUND BACK L/R: 90 W + 90 W

■ Speaker/Preout outputs

• Speaker jacks (7-channel), preout output jacks

(subwoofer)

■ Input/Output terminals

Input terminals

• HDMI input x 4

• Audio/Visual input

[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input

(optical) x 2, analog input x 2

[Video] Component video x 2, composite video x 4

• Audio input (analog) x 2

• Dock input x 1

• V-AUX input

[Audio] Analog x 1

[Video] Composite video x 1

Output terminals

• Monitor output

[Audio/Video] HDMI x 1

[Video] Component video x 1, Composite video x 1

• Audio/Visual output

[Audio] Analog x 1

[Video] Composite video x 1

• Audio output

Analog x 1

■ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the

creation of sound fields

• CINEMA DSP

• Compressed Music Enhancer mode

• Virtual CINEMA DSP

• SILENT CINEMA

■ Digital audio decoders

• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution

Audio, DTS Express

• Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

• DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1,

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

• Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

• DTS NEO:6 decoder

■ Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

• 40-station random and direct preset tuning

• Automatic preset tuning

■ HDMI™

(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

• HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission

capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals

capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

• Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video → HDMI, component video →

HDMI) capability for monitor out

• Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video

output 480i or 480p → 720p, 1080i or 1080p

■ DOCK terminal

• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately)

■ Automatic speaker setup features

• “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker

outputs suitable for listening environments.

■ Other features

• 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

• OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual

system

• Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

• Sleep timer

Features

3 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &

other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-

iPod™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by

Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA”

is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Check that you received all of the following parts.

• Remote control

• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)

• Optimizer microphone

• AM loop antenna

• Indoor FM antenna

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between

the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of

differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

• “ASTANDBY/ON” or “gHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet

or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts.

• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.

Supplied accessories

4 En

A STANDBY/ON

Switches this unit between standby and on (see page 17).

B PHONES jack

For plugging headphones (see page 22).

C INFO

Changes information display screens on the front panel display

(see page 23).

D MEMORY

Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (see page 29).

E PRESET l / h

Selects an FM/AM preset station (see page 29).

F FM

Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (see page 28).

G AM

Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (see page 28).

H TUNING l / h

Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (see page 28).

I SCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (see page 21).

J TONE CONTROL

Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers (see

page 22).

K PROGRAM l / h

Changes sound field programs (see page 24).

L STRAIGHT

Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (see

page 27).

M DIRECT

Changes a sound field program to direct mode (see page 22).

N INPUT l / h

Selects an input source (see page 21).

O OPTIMIZER MIC jack

For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting

output characteristics of speakers (see page 18).

P VOLUME control

Controls the volume of this unit (see page 21).

Q VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack

For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game

console (see page 16).

R AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack

For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game

console (see page 16).

S PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack

For connecting the audio output cable of a portable music player

(see page 16).

T Front panel display

Displays information on this unit (see page 6).

U HDMI THROUGH

Lights up during pass-through output of an HDMI signal input

to this unit while this unit is on standby (see page 42).

Part names and functions

Front panel

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VIDEO

AUDIO

PORTABLE

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

STANDBY

/ON

DIRECT

T D G

J MC OK N

U PFE H

I RBLQS

5 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

a DOCK terminal

For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-

11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (see

page 16).

b HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4

For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external

components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (see page 15).

c ANTENNA jack

For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 17).

d SPEAKERS terminal

For connecting front right and left, center, surround and

surround back speakers (see page 11).

e AV 1-6

For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6

(see page 15).

f AV OUT

Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source

to an external component (see page 16).

g AUDIO 1/2

For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2 (see

page 16).

h MONITOR OUT

Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as

a TV (see page 14).

i AUDIO OUT

Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an

external component (see page 16).

j PRE OUT

For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (see

page 11).

k Power Cable

For connecting this cable to an AC wall outlet (see page 17).

Rear panel

UNBAL.

GND

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

VIDEO

SPEAKERS

DOCK

VIDEO

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 4

AV 5

OUT

AUDI O1

AUDIO2

VIDEO

HDMI

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

OUT

AV 6

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

BACK/

BI-AMP

SURROUND

COMPONENT

abc

ef hgi j

6 En

Part names and functions

a HDMI indicator

Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is

selected as an input source.

b CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP

is selected.

c Tuner indicator

Lights up while receiving a radio broadcast signal from an FM/

AM station (see page 28).

d SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (see page 22).

e VOLUME indicator

Displays volume levels.

f MUTE indicator

Flashes when audio is muted.

g Cursor indicators

Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are

available for operations.

h Multi information display

Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.

i Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently

output.

Front panel display

STEREO

SLEEP

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

MUTE

abcdef

gh ig

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

Subwoofer

Front L

Surround L

Surround back L

Center

Front R

Surround R

Surround back R

Surround back

7 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

a Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

b TRANSMIT

Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.

c CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations

(see page 44).

d SOURCE POWER

Switches an external component on and off.

e SLEEP

Switches the sleep timer operations (see page 22).

f POWER

Switches this unit on and standby.

g Input selection keys

h Tuner keys

i INFO

Changes the information shown on the front panel display (see

page 23).

j Sound selection keys

Selects sound field programs (see page 24).

k SCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (see page 21).

l SETUP

Displays the setup menu (see page 39).

m OPTION

Displays the option menu (see page 33).

n Cursors k / n / l / h/ENTER/RETURN

o VOLUME +/–

Adjust the volume of this unit (see page 21).

p DISPLAY

Changes the operation mode of the iPod connected to the

Yamaha iPod universal dock (see page 30).

q MUTE

Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (see

page 22).

r External component operation keys

Operate recording, playback etc. of external components (see

page 44).

s Numeric keys

Enter numbers.

t TV control keys

Operate a monitor such as a TV or projector.

Remote control

POWER

1234

1256

1234

7856

1234

POWER

SOURCE

V-AU X

[ A ] [ B ] DOCK

TUNER

MOVIE

DVD

TOP

MUSIC

SCENE

OPTIONSETUP

RETURN

REC

ENT

POWER

TV VOL

INPUT

MUTE

TV CH

ENTER

VOLUME

DISPLAY

MUTE

RADIO

STEREO

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

DIRECTSTRAIGHT

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

SLEEP

HDMI

AUDIO

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

TUNING

HDMI 1-4

Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.

AV 1-6

Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.

AUDIO 1/2

Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.

V-AUX

Selects the V-AUX jack on the front

panel of this unit.

[A]/[B]

To control external components using

the rExternal component

operation keys separately from

operations of this unit (see page 44).

DOCK

Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connected to the DOCK jack.

TUNER

Selects the FM/AM tuner.

Switches a band between FM and AM.

MEMORY

Presets radio stations.

PRESET k / n

Selects a preset station.

TUNING k / n

Changes tuning frequencies.

Cursors k / n / l / h

Select menu items displayed on the

front panel display or on a video

monitor, or change settings.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen or

ends the menu display.

8 En

When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on

operations and settings.

Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items

necessary for setup.

For example, prepare the following items for setting up a

5.1-channel sound system.

• Prepare two speakers (for front). The priority of the requirement of other

speakers is as follows:

1 Two surround speakers

2 One center speaker

3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

• If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically

shielded speakers.

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

• This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)

that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic

characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,

and room acoustics, etc.).

You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using

the YPAO technology (see page 18).

Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.

Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.

Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input

source and start playback.

• This unit supports the SCENE function that changes the input source and

sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different

purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene

from those just by pressing a remote control key. See page 21 for details.

Quick start guide

Step 1: Prepare items for setup

Requirements qty.

Speakers Front speaker 2

Center speaker 1

Surround speaker 2

Active subwoofer 1

Speaker cable 5

Subwoofer cable 1

Reproduction component such as DVD player 1

Video monitor such as TV 1

Video cable or HDMI cable 2

Audio cable 2

Front right speaker

Subwoofer

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

Front left speaker

Video monitor

Center speaker

Components

(such as DVD player)

Step 2: Set up your speakers

• Placing speakers ☞P. 10

• Connecting speakers ☞P. 11

Step 3: Connect your components

• Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 14

• Connecting other components ☞P. 15

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 16

• Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 17

Step 4: Turn on the power

• Connecting the power cable ☞P. 17

• Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 17

Step 5: Select the input source and start

playback

• Basic procedure ☞P. 21

• Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 24

9 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

PREPARATION

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+

and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

Notes

• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control narrows

– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries

to leak.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be

different even though they look the same.

• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately,

taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material

comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth,

rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery

compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.

• Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local

regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes,

or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents

of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries

and set the remote control code.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be

sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Notes

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• You can operate external components with this remote control by setting

the remote control code. See page 44 for details.

Preparing remote control

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Using the remote control

30 30

Remote control sensor window

within 6 m (20 ft)

10 En

This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the

optimum surround effect.

7.1-channel speaker layout

6.1-channel speaker layout

5.1-channel speaker layout

■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds

(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at

an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When

using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the

speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom.

■ Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and

right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just

above or just under the center of the TV with the front

surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a

screen, place it just under the center of the screen.

■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds.

Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the

listening position.

To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker

layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1-

channel speaker layout.

■ Surround back left and right speakers (SBL

and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear

effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the

listening position at least 30 cm away from each other,

ideally at the same distance as that between the front left

and right speakers.

In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are mixed down and output

from the single surround back speaker.

In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are output from the surround

left and right speakers.

■ Subwoofer (SW)

The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-

frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital

and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in

amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and

right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections

from a wall.

Connections

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

60˚

30˚

80˚

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker channels

11 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

When you connect speakers, connect them to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout.

■ 7.1-channel

■ 6.1-channel

■ 5.1-channel

Connecting speakers

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

BACK/

BI-AMP

SURROUND

DMI

HDMI 4

OUT

e d

g f

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

f Surround back speaker L SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (L)

g Surround back speaker R SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (R)

h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

f Surround back speaker SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (L)

h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER

12 En

Connections

■ Connecting to the FRONT terminals

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist bare wires of the cable

together so that they will not cause a short

circuits.

2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare

wires into the hole, and then tighten the

knob.

■ Connecting to the CENTER, SURROUND,

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals

1 Press down the tab and insert the bare end of

the speaker cable into the hole in the

terminal.

2 Release the tab to secure the wire.

You can connect speakers that support bi-amplification

connections to this unit. Before connecting the speakers,

set this unit to enable bi-amplification connections in

“ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 45), and connect the

speakers to this unit as shown below.

Connecting the speaker cable

Caution

• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently

or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit

and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this

unit and the other end to that of your speaker.

• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or

speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned on.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If images on the monitor are still distorted even when you use the magnetically

shielded speakers, place the speakers away from the monitor.

• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in “ADVANCED SETUP” before

connecting the speakers (see page 45).

Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K.,

Europe, Asia and Korea models)

Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into

the end of the terminal.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Using bi-amplification connections

Caution

Before making bi-amplification connections, remove

any or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter.

Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details.

When not making bi-amplification connections, make

sure that the brackets or cables are connected before

connecting the speaker cables.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

FRONT

BACK/

BI-AMP

SURROUND

Front speakers

Right Left

This unit

13 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are

connecting.

■ Audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Video/audio jacks

• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI

cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see

page 23).

• You can check error information on HDMI connections (see page 23).

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Jack and cables Description

AUDIO jacks To transmit conventional analog

left and right audio signals. Use

stereo pin cables. Connect red

plugs to red jacks (R) and white

plugs to white jacks (L).

COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio

signals. Use pin cables for digital

audio signals.

OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio

signals. Use optical fiber cables for

optical digital audio signals.

Jack and cables Description

VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional

composite video signals. Use video

pin cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

To transmit component video

signals that include luminance (Y),

chrominance blue (PB) and

chrominance red (PR) components.

Use component video cables.

AUDIO

(white)

(red)

COAXIAL

(orange)

OPTICAL

VIDEO

(yellow)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

(red)

(blue)

(green)

Jack and cables Description

HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and

digital audio signals. Use HDMI

cables.

A video signal input to this unit is output from the

output terminals in MONITOR OUT for the same kind

of signal as the input signal.

For example, if a VCR with a composite output signal

and a DVD player with a COMPONENT VIDEO

output signal are connected, connect both VIDEO jack

and COMPONENT VIDEO jack in MONITOR OUT

to the video monitor.

If an HDMI input compatible monitor is connected, this

unit automatically converts an analog signal that is

input from a video input terminal to a digital video

signal, and then output it from the HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Input Output

Repeat Converted

14 En

Connections

Connect a video monitor such as a TV or projector to an output terminal of this unit. You can select one of the following

three types according to the input signal format supported by the video monitor.

Note

• When you connect this unit to the video monitor, make sure that this unit is on standby.

■ To connect an HDMI video monitor

■ To connect component video monitor

Note

• Only video signals input from this unit via the component input terminal

are output from the component output terminal.

■ To connect composite video monitor

Note

• Only video signals input from this unit via the composite video input

terminal are output from the composite video output terminal.

To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection

between the AV input 1-6 and an audio output terminal.

If the TV supports an optical digital output, we

recommend that you use the AV input 1. Connecting to the

AV input 1 allows you to switch an input source to the AV

input 1 with just a single key operation using the SCENE

function (see page 21).

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

a HDMI input HDMI OUT

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

b Component video output MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

c Video input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

NBAL.

ANTENNA

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2 H

HDMI

TV, or projector

Outputting sound of a TV from this unit

OPTICAL

(

)

UNBAL.

GND

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 4

AV 5

OUT

AUDIO1

VIDEO

AV 6

Digital output

(optical)

TV, or projector

15 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies

from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.

Note

• When you connect this unit to the external components, make sure that this unit is on standby.

■ Audio and video player / Set-top box

• Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the Remote in/out terminal, you can

switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 21).

• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 43).

Connecting other components

Output jacks on the connected external component

Input sources/jacks of this unit

External

components

Signals Output jacks

External component

with HDMI output

Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1

HDMI 2 HDMI 2

HDMI 3 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 4

External component

with component video

output

Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

Video Component video COMPONENT VIDEO

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO

External component

with composite video

output

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 5 AUDIO

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 6 AUDIO

Video Composite output VIDEO

VIDEO

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 4

AV 5

OUT

AUDIO1

AUDIO2

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

AV 6

MONITO

AUDIO

OUT

COMPONENT

NBAL.

ANTENNA

COMPONEN

IDE

DOC

VIDE

MONITOR OUT

Audio / video input (AV 1-6) Audio / video output (AV OUT)

Audio input (AUDIO 1-2)

HDMI input

(HDMI 1-4)

Audio output

(AUDIO OUT)

16 En

Connections

■ Audio player

• We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack.

This unit has the DOCK jack, to which you can connect a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) or

a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10, sold

separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth

component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK

jack.

Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/

receiver and this unit.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to

turn down the volume of this unit and other components

before making connections.

Note

• When external components are connected both the PORTABLE jack and

AUDIO jack, sound input from the PORTABLE jack is output.

Output jacks on the connected external component

Input sources/jacks of this unit

External components Output jacks

External component with optical digital

output

Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

AV 4 OPTICAL

External component with coaxial digital

output

Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

External component with analog audio

output

Analog audio output AV 5 AUDIO

AV 6 AUDIO

AUDIO 1 AUDIO

AUDIO 2 AUDIO

About audio/video output terminals

Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the

selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jack and AUDIO OUT jack. An HDMI input signal,

COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output.

When using the AV OUT jack: connect an external component to the composite or analog audio terminal.

When using the AUDIO OUT jack: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal.

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver

DOCK

UNBAL

ANTENNA

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NENT

Yamaha iPod universal

dock/Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

VIDEO

AUDIO

PORTABLE

VIDEO

AUX

TRAI

INPUT

PTIMIZE

EFFE

D/DV

RADI

ENE

UNIN

DIRE

AUDIO

VIDEO

PORTABLE

Game console/Camcorder Music player

Analog audio

output

Analog audio

output

Video output

17 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are

supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to

the respective jacks.

• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good

reception.

• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.

• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor

antenna. For more details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer

or service center.

• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is

connected.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Connecting the AM loop antenna

The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You

can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other

to the GND terminal.

After all connections are complete, plug the AC power

cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet.

1 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel (or

fPOWER on the remote control) to turn on

this unit.

2 Press ASTANDBY/ON (or fPOWER) again

to turn off this unit (standby mode).

• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.

• You can also turn on this unit by pressing ISCENE (or kSCENE).

• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby

mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall

outlet.

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

UNBAL.

GND

ANTENNA

NEN

VIDE

HDMI

HDMI 1

(

)

HDMI

VIDE

NIT

NEN

Outdoor AM antenna

Connect a 5 to 10 m (16

to 33 ft) vinyl-covered

wire, and extend it

outdoors (use the AM

loop antenna together

with this antenna).

Ground (GND terminal)

The GND terminal is not for earth

grounding.

To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a

vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its

tip, and place it in the moist ground.

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop

antenna

Press and hold ReleaseInsert

Connecting the power cable

Turning this unit on and off

Caution

Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so

may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit

to be saved incorrectly.

To the AC wall outlet

Power cable

18 En

This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the

output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics

of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.

1 Check the following points.

Before starting the automatic setup, check the

following.

• All speakers and subwoofer are connected

properly.

• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

• The video monitor is connected properly.

• This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

• This unit is selected as the video input source of the

video monitor.

• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

• The crossover frequency controls of the connected

subwoofer are set to the maximum.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel

display.

The following menu screen appears on the video monitor.

• You can bring up the above menu screen from the setup menu (see

page 39).

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when

seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to

the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.

4 To select a sound character for adjustment,

press nCursor k to select “EQ Type” and

then press nCursor l / h.

If this unit does not work when you press nCursor,

press lSETUP once and then operate this unit.

This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the

output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer

is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on

automatically measured speaker characteristics.

In “EQ Type,” you can select the following

parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the

desired sound characteristics.

Natural

This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.

Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem

too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat.”

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Caution

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not

allow small children to enter the room during the

procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as

quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is

in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the

results may not be satisfactory.

• See page 39 for the “Manual Setup” procedure.

Using Auto Setup

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

IDE

UDI

RTABLE

VIDE

OPTIMIZER

MIC

Optimizer microphone

1 AutoSetup

. Start

EQ Type;;;;Natural

[ENTER]:Start



[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Optimizer microphone

19 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Flat

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics. Select this if your speakers have

similar qualities.

Front

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics as the front left and right speakers.

Select this if your front left and right speakers have

significantly better qualities than the other speakers.

5 Press nCursor n to select “Start” and then

press nENTER to start the setup procedure.

A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10

seconds. A loud test tone is output during

measurement.

Notes

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• Press nCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.

When measurement is successfully completed,

“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display

and the results appear on the monitor.

Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in

the following order:

Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround

Back/Subwoofer

DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening position

in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

LVL

Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level

Notes

• If “ERROR” appears on the video monitor during “Auto Setup,”

measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details,

see “When an error message is displayed during measurement”

(page 20).

• If problems occur during measurement, “WARNING (XX)” (xx indicates

the number of warning) appears above “RESULT” (see page 20).

6 Press nENTER to confirm the settings.

The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to

measurement results.

To cancel the operation, press nCursor l / h to

select “Cancel” and press nENTER.

When the following screen appears, remove the

optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now

complete.

• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel.”

• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of

speakers.

• If you press nENTER before removing the optimizer microphone,

“1 Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the setup menu (see page 39) is

displayed.

Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise

results, stay where you will not disturb the

measurement, such as to the side of or behind the

speakers or outside the room.

1 AutoSetup

RESULT

[ENTER]:Finish

SP:3/4/0.1

DIST:8.0/8.5ft

LVL:-3.5/+4.5dB

. >Set Cancel

[]/[]:Select

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it

in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after

measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be

subjected to high temperatures such on an AV

component.

1 AutoSetup

AUTOSETUPComplete

[SETUP]:Exit



DisconnectMicrophone

PRESS[ENTER]

20 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Select “Retry” or “Exit” using nCursor l / h

and then press nENTER.

Retry

Performs “Auto Setup” again.

Exit

Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup.”

• See page 51 for details on error messages.

• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To

continue measurement, select “Proceed.” However, we recommend that

you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.

If a problem occurs during measurement, “WARNING” is

displayed on the result display screen. Check the error and

solve the problems.

• See page 52 for details on warning messages.

• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is

displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto

Setup” again.

1 Check if “→” is displayed on the left of

“WARNING” and press nENTER.

Details of the warning message are displayed. If there

are multiple warning messages, you can display the

next message using nCursor h.

2 To return to the top result display, press

nENTER again.

When an error message is displayed

during measurement

ERROR

Don't



operate

.E-9:USER CANCEL

[ENTER]:Return

any function

>RetryExit

[]/[]:Select

When a warning message is displayed

after measurement

WARNING

Reversechannel

W-1:OUTOFPHASE

[ENTER]:Return

FL---

CENTER

SL---



SBL---

21 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

BASIC OPERATION

1 Turn on external components (TV, DVD

player, etc.) connected to this unit.

2 Press NINPUT l / h (or gInput

selection keys) to select an input source.

The name of the selected input source is displayed for

a few seconds.

• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel

display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see

page 43).

3 Play the external component that you have

selected as the source input, or select a radio

station on the tuner.

Refer to the operating instructions of the external

component for details on playback. For selecting

radio stations or playback of an iPod or Bluetooth

component using this unit, see the following.

• FM/AM radio tuning (see page 28)

• Bluetooth component playback (see page 32)

• iPod playback (see page 30)

4 Turn the PVOLUME control to adjust the

volume (or press oVOLUME +/–).

This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change

input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four

scenes are available for different usages, such as playing

movies or music. The following input sources and sound

field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.

• When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing the

SCENE key.

Press ISCENE (or kSCENE).

Select the desired input source/sound field

program, and pressing down ISCENE (or

kSCENE) until “SET Complete” appears on the

front panel display.

While display in the OPTION menu or SETUP menu,

“SCENE Setting Complete” appears on the video monitor

(OSD).

You can operate an external component with the remote

control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the

external component for each input source. Setting remote

control codes for desired input sources allows you to

switch between external components linked to scene

selections.

1 Register the remote control code of an

external component to the desired input

source (see page 44).

Note

• Remote control codes cannot be registered to TUNER input.

Playback

Basic procedure

Note

When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some

conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure

that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is

output, do the following.

1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,

only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this

unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the

condition is not improved, the problem may results from the

playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the

playback component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu

after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to

“DTS” (see page 33).

VOL.

AV1

Input source name

VOL.

SL SR

Volume-18.5dB

Volume

Using the SCENE function

Input source Sound field program

BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight

TV AV 1 Straight

CD AV 3 Straight

RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer

Selecting a SCENE

Registering input source/sound field

program

Switching remotely controlled external

components linked to scene selections

22 En

Playback

2 Press gInput selection keys on the

remote control for the input source whose

remote control code was registered in step 1

for about 3 seconds while pressing down

kSCENE key whose assignment you want

to change.

The external component can now be controlled

remotely just by selecting a scene.

1 Press qMUTE on the remote control to mute

the audio output.

The MUTE indicator on the front panel display

flashes while audio output is muted.

2 Press qMUTE again to resume audio

output.

You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range

(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output

from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.

1 Press JTONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”

The current setting is displayed on the front panel

display.

2 Adjust the frequency range using

KPROGRAM l / h.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

The display returns the previous screen soon after you

release the key.

Notes

• The tone control settings are not effective during playback in direct

mode.

• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from

other channels well.

Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of

the selected source. When Direct mode is activated, this

unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry.

Press MDIRECT (or jDIRECT) to turn the

Direct mode on or off.

The following features are disabled in Direct mode.

– sound field program, tone control

– display and operation of the option menu and setup

• While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes dim.

When setting it back off, the brightness of the screen returns to the

previous setting.

The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source.

Press eSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of

time.

Each time you press eSLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the

front panel display lights up.

Press eSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until

“Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display.

Plug your headphones in the BPHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program while using the

headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT

CINEMA mode.

Notes

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker

terminals.

• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are

divided to left and right channels.

Muting audio output temporarily

(MUTE)

Adjusting high/low frequency sound

(tone control)

Treble

0.0dB

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Using the sleep timer

Using your headphones

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

23 En

Playback

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

When HDMI1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source,

you can display audio/video signal information.

• Input signal information is displayed on both a video monitor and the

front panel display.

• Information on the input signal is also displayed on the front panel

display. You can select the desired item using nCursor k / n.

1 Select the desired input source, and press

mOPTION.

The option menu for the selected input source is

displayed (see page 33).

2 Press nCursor k / n to select “Signal Info,”

and press nENTER.

Information on input signals is displayed. See

page 34 on messages displayed on the screen.

Notes

• If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• Information on the input signal is also displayed on the front panel

display. You can select the desired item using nCursor k / n.

3 To end the information display, press

mOPTION.

Information displayed on the front panel display can be

changed by pressing CINFO (or iINFO).

The following information can be displayed according to

the input source.

For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP

Program,” the following screen appears on the front panel

display.

Displaying input signal information Changing information on the front

panel display

HDMI1-4: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

AV1-6: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

AUDIO1-2: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

V-AUX: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

FM/AM: Frequency, DSP Program, Audio

Decoder

iPod (Simple remote mode): Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

iPod (Menu browse mode): (in PlayInfo displayed) Artist, Album,

Song, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

(in Play menu displayed) List

Bluetooth: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder

Straight

Input source

Sound field program (DSP program)

24 En

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds

for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.

■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel

Press KPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select a desired sound field program.

■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control

Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.

Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press jMOVIE repeatedly.

Sound field programs for music........................................................Press jMUSIC repeatedly.

Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly.

Multi-channel stereo reproduction....................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly.

Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly.

Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press jSUR.DECODE repeatedly.

For example, if you select “Sci-Fi” in “movie/TV program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display.

Notes

• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input

source is applied again.

• When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources, this unit

does not apply any sound field program other than the surround decoder and they are played back in straight decode mode.

• If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.

This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select

a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (see page 6).

• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 36.

• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP.

Enjoy the sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Sound field program descriptions

For movie/TV program sources

Program Descriptions

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic

positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an

ideal movie theater,” in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent

dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-

featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between

dialog, sound effects and background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to

the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio

channels and the clarity of the sound.

Sci-Fi

Program name

Sound field program category

25 En

Enjoy the sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to

musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones

and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue

the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a

good old movie theater.

The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable

space with a certain sound depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live

feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center

while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence

in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data

that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling

by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for

movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during

play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.

For audio music sources

Program Descriptions

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the

interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,

creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very

full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant

reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field

features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor

can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener

can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals

and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a

big live hall.

For stereo reproduction

Program Descriptions

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.

Program Descriptions

26 En

Enjoy the sound field programs

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.

• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (see page 27) when multi-channel audio signal is input.

For Multi-channel stereo reproduction

Program Descriptions

7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit

downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

The Compressed Music Enhancer

Program Descriptions

Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel

compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Surround decode mode

Decoder Descriptions

Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.

PLIIx Movie /

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Music /

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Game /

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.

27 En

Enjoy the sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In straight decoding mode, sounds are reproduced without

sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output

from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel

input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced

without a sound field effect.

1 To enable straight decoding mode, press

LSTRAIGHT (or jSTRAIGHT).

“Straight” appears on the front panel display.

2 To cancel straight decoding mode, press

LSTRAIGHT (or jSTRAIGHT) again.

A sound field program name appears on the front

panel display, and sound is reproduced with that

sound field effect.

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound

field surround effects even without any surround speakers

by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy

Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

When “Sur. L/R SP” in the setup menu is set to “None”

(see page 40), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode.

Note

• Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the following conditions

even if you set “Sur. L/R SP” to “None” (see page 40).

– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.

– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.

– direct mode or straight decoding mode is used.

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode

is automatically selected when you connect the headphone

plug to the PHONES jack.

Note

• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.

– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.

– direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decoding mode)

Enjoying sound field programs without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA

DSP)

Enjoy sound field programs with

headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)

28 En

The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two

modes for tuning.

■ Frequency tuning mode (Auto tuning /

Manual tuning)

You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching

or specifying its frequency.

■ Preset tuning mode (Preset tuning)

You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by

registering them to specific numbers, and later just select

those numbers to tune in.

Note

• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.

1 Press NINPUT l / h (or gTUNER)

repeatedly and switch the input source to

“TUNER.”

2 Press FFM (hFM) or GAM (hAM) to select

a band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display

according to the band that you have selected.

3 Press HTUNING l / h (or hTUNING k /

n) to specify the frequency.

To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or

k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n).

The TUNED indicator on the front panel display

lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The

STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being

broadcasted is in stereo.

The frequency changes in the following manner according

to how you press HTUNING l / h (or hTUNING k

/ n).

When you press the key more than 1 second

The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is

detectable around the current frequency. This is effective

when the tuner can receive strong signals without any

interference. Once the search starts, release the key.

When you keep holding the key, the search continues even

when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to

tune in to a specific station.

When you press and release the key

The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.

Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong

signals and stations are skipped during the search. You can

listen to better quality sound even when the tuner cannot

receive a strong signal.

• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the

option menu (see page 34).

4 To tune in by direct frequency tuning, enter

the frequency of the desired station using

the numeric keys on the remote control.

Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set

the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889” using

sNumeric keys.

Note

• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you

enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the

entered frequency is correct.

You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset) using

“Automatic station preset” or “Manual station preset.”

The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong

signals and registers up to 40 stations. AM stations cannot

be automatically registered. Use manual station preset.

1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

gTUNER) to switch the input source to

“TUNER.”

2 Press mOPTION on the remote control.

The option menu screen for setting options of tuner

input appears on the front panel display.

• For details on the option menu, see page 33.

• The option menu is displayed on monitor components.

3 Select “Auto Preset,” and press nENTER.

Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later

from the lowest frequency upwards.

• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by

pressing hPRESET k / n or n Cursor k / n while the front

panel display is in the state as shown in the below figure.

• To cancel registration, press nRETURN on the remote control.

FM/AM tuning

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station

(Frequency tuning)

STEREO

TUNED

FM92.5MHz

Registering FM/AM stations and

tuning in (Preset tuning)

Registering stations by automatic station

preset

Auto Preset

01:FM87.5MHz

Preset number Frequency

Status

29 En

FM/AM tuning

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

During the automatic station preset, the upper area of

the screen changes as follows: READY → SEARCH

→ MEMORY each time a station is registered.

When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears

and the option menu screen automatically reappears.

When you press mOPTION on the remote control,

the screen returns to the original state.

You can manually register AM stations or FM stations

with weak signals.

1 Tune in to a station referring to “Tuning in to

the desired FM/AM station (Frequency

tuning)” (see page 28).

2 Press DMEMORY (or hMEMORY).

“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,

followed soon by the preset number to which the

station will be registered.

• By pressing down DMEMORY (or hMEMORY) for more

than 2 seconds, you can skip step 3 and register the preset number

to be one higher than the last preset number.

3 Press EPRESET l / h (or hPRESET k / n)

on the remote control to select the preset

number to which the station will be

registered.

When you select a preset number to which no station

is registered, “Empty” appears on the display. When

you select a registered preset number, a registered

frequency is displayed on the right of the preset

number.

• You can select a preset number using the sNumeric keys.

4 Press DMEMORY (or hMEMORY) again to

When registration is complete, the screen returns to

the original state.

To end the operation, press mOPTION.

• To cancel registration, press nRETURN on the remote control

or leave the tuner without any operations for about 30 seconds.

You can call preset stations registered by automatic station

preset or manual station preset.

Press EPRESET l / h (or hPRESET k / n) to

select a preset number.

• Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped.

• When “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed it means that

no stations are registered. See page 28 and register stations.

• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a sNumeric

keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if

you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong

Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number.

1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

gTUNER) to switch the input source to

“TUNER.”

2 Press mOPTION on the remote control.

The option menu screen for setting options of tuner

input appears on the front panel display.

3 Display “Clear Preset” using the nCursor k

/ n and press nENTER.

The following screen appears on the display.

• You can cancel the operation and return to the option menu screen

by pressing nRETURN on the remote control.

4 Select the preset number of the registered

station you want to clear using the nCursor

k / n and press nENTER.

The preset station registered to the selected preset

number is cleared. To clear the registration of

multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps.

To end the operation, press mOPTION.

Registering stations by manual station

preset

01:Empty

Flashing

New registered frequency

Empty (or frequency that is currently

registered to the preset number)

Preset

number

Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)

Clearing the preset station

01:FM92.5MHz

Preset number of the registered station you want to clear.

30 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (see page 16), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied

remote control or the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of

this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see

page 24).

Notes

• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using

the YDS-11.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section on page 50.

You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod

universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The

operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the

video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple

remote mode).

When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform

the following operations with the remote control.

You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,

etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying

the menu on the video monitor. You can also directly

control your iPod in this mode.

You can perform advanced iPod operations using the

remote control while looking at the menu displayed on the

video monitor. You can browse the song files or video files

stored on your iPod and displayed on the monitor, and

change the settings of your iPod to suit your personal

preferences. You cannot directly control your iPod in this

mode.

• “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.

1 Change the input source to “iPod (DOCK)”

using NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK).

2 Press pDISPLAY on the remote control.

The following screen appears on the video monitor.

3 Press nCursor k / n to select “Music,”

“Videos” or “Settings” and press nCursor

• Select “Music” to browse music files.

• Select “Videos” to browse video files.

Note

• “Videos” will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod

universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing

video files.

Using iPod™

Controlling iPod™

Key Function

ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

w Search backward (Press and hold)

f Search forward (Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

p DISPLAY

Switch between Menu browse mode and

Simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in menu browse mode

iPodTop

Videos>

Music>



31 En

Using iPod™

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press nCursor k / n / l / h to select a

menu item and then nENTER to start

playback.

Menu items of “Music”

Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

Menu items of “Videos”

Menu items vary depending on the files stored on

your iPod.

■ Description of the play information display

a Track number/total tracks

b Artist name

c Album title

d Song title

e Progress bar

f Elapsed time

g Shuffle and repeat icons

h (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and

(search backward)

i Remaining time

• You can change information screens on the front panel display using

CINFO (or iINFO) (see page 23). Items displayed on the front panel

display vary depending on mode that is currently selected.

You can use a special playback function such as shuffle

playback and repeat playback by setting the option menu.

1 Press pDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input

source.

The option menu can be displayed only in menu

browse mode. Press pDISPLAY to switch to menu

browse mode before starting shuffle or repeat

playback.

2 Press mOPTION.

The option menu is displayed.

3 Press nCursor k / n to select the desired

playback function, Shuffle or Repeat, then

press nENTER.

The following playback styles are available

depending on the playback function selected.

Shuffle: Plays back songs or albums in random

order (Choices: Off, Songs, Albums).

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.

• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random

order.

Repeat: Plays back songs or albums repeatedly

(Choices: Off, One, All).

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

• Select “One” to repeat each song.

• Select “All” to repeat all songs.

4 Select the desired style using nCursor l /

The style is selected. Playback starts with the

function selected in step 3.

To return to the previous screen, press nRETURN.

To return to the previous playback function, redo the

above steps.

• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the video monitor.

• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All,” “ ” or “ ” appears on the

video monitor.

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

Shuffle/repeat playback

1 All

32 En

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of

this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without

wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance.

Note

• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.

“Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth

component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must

be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit

for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted.

• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the

Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with

which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary,

refer to the other component’s operating instructions.

■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver and your Bluetooth™ component

1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using

NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK).

2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

For details on operation of the Bluetooth component,

refer to its operating instructions.

3 Press mOPTION.

The option menu for DOCK input appears on the

video monitor.

4 Press nCursor n to select “Pairing” and

press nENTER.

“Searching” appears on the front panel display and

the pairing operation starts.

• To cancel pairing, press nRETURN.

• You can also start pairing operation by pressing and holding

DMEMORY on the front panel.

5 Make sure the Bluetooth component

recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver.

If the Bluetooth have recognized the Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA,” for

instance, is displayed in the Bluetooth device list.

6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

from the Bluetooth device list, and enter a

path key “0000” into the Bluetooth

component.

When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on

the front panel display.

• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to

eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data

for the least recently used other component is cleared.

1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using

NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK).

2 Press mOPTION.

3 Press nCursor n repeatedly to select

“Connect” and press nENTER.

After you execute “Connect,” communication with

the Bluetooth component is established. When the

connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT

Connected” appears on the front panel display.

• When you press nENTER on the remote control, the connected

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last

connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found”

appears on the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the

Bluetooth component, display the option menu again, select

“Disconnect,” and press nENTER.

4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver and your Bluetooth

component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

DOCKOPTION

Connect

.VolumeTrim

[ENTER]:Select

Pairing

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

33 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

This unit has an OPTION menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure

for setting the OPTION menu items is described below.

1 Select an input source using NINPUT l / h

(gInput selection keys).

2 Press mOPTION on the remote control.

The OPTION menu appears. The displayed OPTION

menu items differ depending on the input source. For

details, see the following section.

3 Select the desired menu item using

nCursor k / n, and press nENTER.

Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed.

4 Change the setting of the selected menu item

(or enable a function) using nCursor k / n /

l / h and nENTER.

Details of the selected menu item are displayed.

Parameters you can set differ depending on the menu

items.

5 To close the OPTION menu, press

mOPTION.

You can also use nRETURN to return to the

previous screen or close the OPTION menu.

• When nCursor or other keys do not work after completing the

menu, select the input source again using gInput selection

keys.

The following menu items are provided for each input

source.

Details of the menu items are as follows:

• The default settings are marked with “*.”

■ Volume Trim

Reduces any change in volume when switching input

sources by correcting volume differences between input

sources.

You can set this parameter for each input source.

Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)

HDMI1OPTION

DecoderMode

.VolumeTrim

[ENTER]:Select

ExtendedSurround

SignalInfo

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

OPTION menu items

Input

Source

Menu item

HDMI1-4 Volume

Trim

Decoder

Mode

Extended

Surround

Signal Info

AV1-4 Volume

Trim

Decoder

Mode

Extended

Surround

Signal Info

AV5-6 Volume

Trim

AUDIO1-2 Volume

Trim

V-AUX Volume

Trim

TUNER Volume

Trim

FM Mode Auto

Preset

Clear

Preset

iPod

(DOCK)

Vo l u m e

Trim

Shuffle Repeat

Bluetooth

(DOCK)

Vo l u m e

Trim

Connect/

Disconnect

Pairing

Input source: All

Adjustable range: -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB* to +6.0 dB

(in 0.5 dB steps)

34 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)

■ Decoder Mode

Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.

■ Extended Surround

Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are

used.

■ Signal Info

Displays information on audio and video signals on the

video monitor and front panel display. You can change

information to be displayed on the front panel display

using nCursor k / n.

■ Audio information

Notes

• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed

when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.

• The bit rate may vary during playback.

■ Video information

HDMI error message

(appears only when an error has occurred)

■

FM Mode

Sets FM broadcasting receiving mode.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4

Choices: Auto*/DTS

Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.

DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals

are not reproduced.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4

Choices: Auto*/PLIIxMovie/PLIIxMusic/EX/ES/

Off

Auto Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder according to whether a flag for

reproducing surround back channel is present,

and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel.

PLIIx

Movie

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder

whether or not surround back channel signals

are contained. You can select this parameter

when one or two speakers are connected.

PLIIx

Music

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether

or not surround back channel signals are

contained. You can select this parameter when

one or two speakers are connected.

EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder for input signals whether or not the

flag for reproducing surround back channel is

present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-

channel.

Off Always reproduces signals in 5.1-channel

whether or not the flag for reproducing

surround back channel is present.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4

Signal Info parameters

Information Description

Format

Format of digital audio signals.

Channel

The number of input signal channels (front/

surround/LFE).

For example, if input signal channels are 3

front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/

0.1” is displayed.

If a channel that cannot be expressed as the

above, a total number of channels such as

“5.1ch” may be displayed.

Sampling

The sampling frequency per second in

analog-to-digital conversion.

Bitrate

The bit rate of input signal per second.

Information Description

Format and resolution of video input signal.

Out

Format and resolution of video output signal.

Message

Error messages about HDMI signals and

HDMI components. See the following for

details of the error messages.

HDCP Error

HDCP authentication failed.

Device Over

The number of HDMI components connected is

over the limit.

Out of Res.

The connected monitor is not compatible with

the video input signal.

Input source: TUNER

Choices: Stereo*/Mono

Stereo Receives in stereo mode.

Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get better

reception in MONO mode.

35 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Auto Preset

Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency

band and registers them as preset stations (see page 28).

■

Clear Preset

Clears the preset stations (see page 29).

■

Shuffle

Changes the shuffle playback style (see page 31).

■

Repeat

Changes the repeat playback style (see page 31).

■

Connect / Disconnect

Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on

and off (see page 32).

■

Pairing

Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component

(see page 32).

Input source: TUNER

Input source: iPod (DOCK)

Choices: Off*/Songs/Albums

Input source: iPod (DOCK)

Choices: Off*/One/All

Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK)

36 En

When using sound field programs for movies or TV

programs (except for Mono Movie), you can select a

surround decoder to be used with the sound field program

after setting the parameters from the following decoders.

To set the parameters for sound field programs, see the

following section.

Decoders that can be used with a sound field

program

• PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie)

• Neo:6 Cinema

Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as

they are with the default parameters, you can arrange

sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions

of sources or rooms by setting the parameters (sound field

elements).

• You can protect the sound field against the changes of parameters the

sound filed parameters when “Memory Guard” of the setup menu is set

to “On” (see page 43). To change the parameters, set it to “Off.”

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press lSETUP on the remote control.

The setup menu appears on the monitor.

3 Press nCursor k / n to select “DSP

Parameter” and press nENTER.

The screen changes as follows.

4 Press nCursor k / n to move “→” to the

sound field program and press nCursor l /

h to select the sound field program.

5 Press nCursor k / n to select the parameter

that you want to change, and press nCursor

l / h to change the parameter.

An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field

parameter name displayed on the monitor when you

change the parameter from its default setting. For

details on functions and adjustable ranges of the

sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters”

on this page.

• Repeat steps 4 and 5 to change other sound field program

parameters.

6 To end the edit, press nRETURN.

• The default settings are marked with “*.”

DSP Level

Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect

to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field

effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as

follows.

• The effect sound is too soft.

• There are no differences between effects of the sound

field programs.

→Increase the effect level.

• The sound is dull.

• The sound field effect is added too much.

→Reduce the effect level.

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

Selecting a decoder used with a sound

field program

Setting sound field parameters

MOVIE

DSP Level;;;;;0dB

.Sci-Fi

 []/[]:Select

Initialize



[

SUR.;;;;PLI

Movie

Sound field program

Sound field parameters

Cursor

Set values

To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field

program, nCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize”

and then press, nCursor h. When the confirmation

screen appears on the monitor, press nCursor h to

confirm the initialization or nCursor l to cancel it.

Sound field parameters

CINEMA DSP parameters

Adjustable range: -6 dB to 0 dB* to +3 dB

37 En

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ 2ch Stereo only

Direct

Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the

input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.

■ 7ch Stereo only

CT Level/SL Level/SR Level/

SB Level

Adjusts the volume of the center (CT), surround L (SL)

surround R (SR) and surround back (SB) channels in the

7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ

depending on the setting of the speakers.

■ Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only

Effect Level

Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.

When the high-frequency signals of the source is

emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low.” To

reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low.” To increase

the effect, set it to “High.”

You can customize decoder effects by setting the

following parameters. For kinds of decoders, see page 26.

■ When PLIIx Music/PLII Music is selected

Panorama

Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends

stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front

speakers for a wraparound effect.

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound

field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the

difference in level created by the software being played

back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround

sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative

and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value

more positive.

Center Width

You can spread the center sound toward left and right

according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for

outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,

or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.

■ When Neo:6 Music is selected

C.Image

Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to

the center channel to make the center channel more or less

dominant as necessary.

Parameters only usable in certain sound

field programs

Choices: Auto*/Off

Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and

tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”

tone controls are both set to 0 dB.

Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit.

Adjustable range: 0 to 100%

Choices: High*/Low

Decoder parameters

Choices: Off*/On

Adjustable range: -3 to STD* to +3

Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7

Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0

38 En

You can call the setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.

You can change the following settings in the setup menu. For details, read “Basic operation of the setup menu” first, and

see the respective pages.

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Menu/Submenu Function Page

Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers. 39

1 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 39

2 Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 39

A)Config Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the

connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

B)Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 41

C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between

speakers and the listening position.

D)Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 41

E)Test Tone Generates test tones. 41

Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs. 41

1 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 41

2 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 41

HDMI Auto Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between

video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals.

Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto. 42

Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output. 42

Function Setup Set various items for HDMI and display. 42

1 HDMI Sets various items for input sources. 42

Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the

HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby.

Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack.

Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input

signals.

Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog

video input signals.

2 Display Set items for a monitor or the front panel display. 42

Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 42

FL Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 42

OSD Shift Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor. 43

3 Volume Sets items for volumes. 43

Adaptive DRC Adjust the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the

minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally

increased.

Init. Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 43

4 Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on a video monitor or the front panel

display.

DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 43

Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 43

39 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The setup menu screen appears on both video display

(OSD) and front panel display.

Video display (OSD)

Front panel display

In this section, procedures of setting menus using the

video monitor are described.

1 Press lSETUP on the remote control.

The setup menu screen appears.

2 Select a menu using nCursor k / n, and

press nENTER.

Items of the selected menu are displayed. For

example, the following screen appears when you

select “Function Setup.”

• You can return to the previous screen by pressing nRETURN.

3 To display submenus, select a menu that you

want to set using nCursor k / n, and press

nENTER.

For example, the following screen appears when you

select “2 Display.”

4 Select an item using nCursor k / n, and

change the setting of the item using

nCursor l / h.

Some items in the Manual Setup menu of Speaker

Setup take up a full screen. To display other items in

the Manual Setup menu, press nCursor k / n.

“A)Config” display (example)

• You can change other items by repeating step 4.

5 To finish the setting, press lSETUP.

• When nCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu,

select the input source again using gInput selection keys.

You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of

adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup (YPAO)”

for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”

for manual adjustment.

• The default settings are marked with “*.”

Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to

obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on

positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic

characteristics or the room, which are automatically

measured. For details on operations, see page 18.

Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on

manually set parameters.

After Auto Setup (YPAO) is performed, you can check

automatically adjusted parameters in the Manual Setup

menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if

necessary.

■

A)Config

Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of

speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound

reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:

Large or Small. Large and Small refer to speakers with woofer diameters

16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.

LFE/Bass Out

Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency

components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)

channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.

Basic operation of the setup menu

SetupMenu

;SoundSetup

.;SpeakerSetup

[ENTER]:Enter

;FunctionSetup

;DSPParameter

;MemoryGuard

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;SpeakerSetup

;FunctionSetup

2Display

. 1HDMI

[ENTER]:Enter

3Volume

4InputRename

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

2Display

FLScroll;;Continue

. Dimmer;;;;;;;;;;;;0

OSDShift;;;;;;;;;0

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

[]/[]:Adjust

[

Speaker Setup

1 Auto Setup

2 Manual Setup

Choices: SWFR/Front/Both*

A)Config

Center SP

None >Small Large



40 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

LFE channel signals

Low-frequency components of other channel signals

Front SP

Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.

Note

• When “LFE/Bass Out” is set to “Front,” you can only select “Large.” If

“LFE/Bass Out” is changed to “Front,” “Front SP” automatically

switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small.”

Center SP

Sets the size of center speaker.

Sur. L/R SP

Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.

• When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Sur.B L/R SP

Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.

• When “None” is selected, “PLIIx Movie” or “PLIIx Music” cannot be

selected.

Crossover Freq.

Sets the lower limit of the low frequency component

output from a speaker with a size set to “Small (SMLx1/

SMLx2).” Sound with a frequency below that limit is

output from a subwoofer or front speakers.

If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover

frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover

frequency at the maximum.

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are

lacking or unclear.

Parameter Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Both Output Not output Not output

SWFR Output Not output Not output

Front Not output Output Not output

Parameter Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Both [1] [2] [3]

SWFR [4] [3] [3]

Front Not output [1] [3]

[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to

“Small.”

[2] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels.

[3] Outputs low frequency components when the sizes of speakers

are set to “Large.”

[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,

the size of which is set to “Small.”

Choices: Small/Large*

Small Select this when small speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of the

front left and right channels are output from a

subwoofer.

Large Select this when large speakers are

connected.

Choices: None/Small*/Large

None Select this when no center speaker is

connected. Center channel signals are spread

to front left and right speakers.

Small Select this when a small center speaker is

connected. Low-frequency components of

center channel are output from a subwoofer.

If a subwoofer is not connected they are

output from front speakers.

Large Select this when a large center speaker is

connected.

Choices: None/Small*/Large

None Select this when no surround speakers are

connected. Surround channel signals are

spread to front left and right speakers. “Sur.B

L/R SP” automatically switches to “None”

when this is selected.

Small Select this when small surround speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of

surround channels are output from a

subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected

they are output from front speakers.

Large Select this when large surround speakers are

connected.

Choices: None/SMLx1/SMLx2*/LRGx1/LRGx2

None Select this when no surround back speaker

are connected. Surround back channel signals

are output from the surround L/R speakers

and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,

they are output from the surround L/R

speakers and front speakers.

SMLx1 Select this when one small surround back

speaker is connected.

SMLx2 Select this when two small surround back

speakers are connected.

LRGx1 Select this when one large surround back

speaker is connected.

LRGx2 Select this when two large surround back

speakers are connected.

Choices: 40Hz/60Hz/80Hz*/90Hz/100Hz/110Hz/120Hz/

160Hz/200Hz

Choices: Normal*/Reverse

Normal Select this not to change the phase of your

subwoofer.

Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

41 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ B)Level

Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the

sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the

listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending

on the number of speakers connected.

• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears

instead of “SBL” and “SBR.”

• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test

Tone” to “On” (see page 41).

• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,

set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.

■ C)Distance

Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so

that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at

the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of

each speaker.

Unit

Front L

/ Front R / Center / Sur. L /

Sur. R / Sur.B L / Sur.B R / SWFR

• Different items are displayed depending on settings of “A)Config” (see

page 39).

• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “Sur.B” appears

instead of “Sur.B L” and “Sur.B R.”

■ D)Equalizer

Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic

equalizer.

EQ Type Select

Select an equalizer type.

GEQ

Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic

equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust

signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.

To adjust the signal level in each range, select the desired

speaker with nCursor l / h while “→” is displayed

next to “Channel,” then select the desired frequency band

with nCursor k / n, and adjust the signal level with

nCursor l / h.

■

E)Test Tone

Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates

test tones. To turn on the oscillator, select “On” using

nCursor l / h. When “On” is selected, you can adjust

the settings of “2 Manual Setup” while listening to a test

tone.

You can set various items for sound outputs.

■

1 Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for

reproducing bitstream signals.

■

2 Lipsync

Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.

HDMI Auto

Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video

signals when a monitor that supports an automatic lip-

sync function is connected to this unit.

Adjustable range: -10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5 dB step)

Defaults: “FR.L/FR.R/SWFR” 0dB*

“CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR” -1.0dB

Choices: meters (m)/feet (ft)*

meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters.

feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet.

Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)

Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) “Front L/Front R/

SWFR”

2.60m (8.5ft) “Center”

2.40m (8.0ft) “Sur. L/Sur. R/

Sur.B L/Sur.B R”

Choices: Auto PEQ/GEQ*/Off

Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in

“Auto Setup.” Characteristics of the

currently used parametric equalizer (see

page 18) are displayed below “Auto PEQ.”

GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press nENTER

to adjust the characteristics of the graphic

equalizer.

Off Not use a graphic equalizer.

Choices: 63Hz/160Hz/400Hz/1kHz/2.5kHz/

6.3kHz/16kHz

Adjustable range: -6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5 dB step)

Choices: Off*/On

Off Not generate test tones.

On Generates test tones.

Sound Setup

Choices: Min/Auto/STD/Max*

Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for

low volume or a quiet environment, such as

at night, for bitstream signals except for

Dolby TrueHD signals.

(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby

TrueHD signals based on input signal

information.

STD Sets the standard dynamic range

recommended for regular home use.

Max Outputs sound without adjusting the

dynamic range of the input signals.

Choices: Off*/On

Off Select this when the connected monitor does

not support the automatic lip-sync function or

you do not use the automatic lip-sync function.

Set the correction time in “Manual Delay.”

On Select this when the connected monitor

supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine

adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay.”

42 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Auto Delay

Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto” is set

to “On.” The actual correction time is displayed under in

“Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in

“Offset” field.

Manual Delay

Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when

the connected monitor does not support the automatic lip-

sync function or you set “HDMI Auto” to “Off.”

You can set various items for HDMI and display.

You can set items for HDMI.

■

Standby Through

Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the

HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on

standby. When this parameter is set to “On” signals input

from the HDMI 1-4 jacks can be output to a monitor

component.

• To enables pass-through output, any one of the input sources connected

to the HDMI1-4 must be selected before switching to standby.

• When Standby Through turns on, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on the

front panel display lights up. While the indicator lights up, this unit

consumes up to 3W of power even on standby.

■ Audio Output

Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via

the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound

signals input from the HDMI IN jack.

Note

• Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the

monitor vary depending on specifications of the monitor.

■ Resolution

Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted

from analog video input signals and output from the

HDMI OUT jack.

Notes

• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog

video signals cannot be upscaled.

• When a video monitor is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this

unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An

asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution.

• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set

“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (see page 45) and

try it again.

■ Aspect

Set a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images

reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT

jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog

video input signals by a video conversion function.

Notes

• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set

to “Thrgh.”

• The setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.

• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are

input from the HDMI IN jack or 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input.

You can set items for a monitor or the front panel display.

■

Dimmer

Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is

lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is

darkened.

Note

• The brightness of display does not become bright in direct mode even if

the value is increased.

■ FL Scroll

Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of

characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.

Adjustable range: 0 to 240ms (1 ms step)

Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)

Function Setup

1 HDMI

Choices: On/Off*

On Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Choices: Amp*/TV/Amp+TV

Amp Outputs HDMI sound signals form the

speakers connected to this unit.

TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers of a TV connected to this unit.

Sound output from the speakers connected to

this unit is muted.

Amp+TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers connected to this unit and the

speakers of a TV connected to this unit.

Choices: Through*/480p/720p/1080i/1080p

Choices: Thrgh*/16:9/Smart

Thrgh Outputs the video signals without changing

the aspect ratio.

16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 monitor with black bands

on the right and left sides of the monitor

screen.

Smart Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 monitor by stretching right

and left of images to fit in the monitor screen.

2 Display

Adjustable range: -4 to 0*

Choices: Continue*/Once

Continue Repeatedly displays all characters by

scrolling.

Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,

halts scrolling, and then displays first 14

characters.

43 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ OSD Shift

Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed

on the video monitor. To move up the screen, set this value

larger. To move down the screen, set it smaller.

You can set items for volumes.

■

Adaptive DRC

Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume

level. This feature is useful when you are listening at

lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,

the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.

If the VOLUME setting is low:

the dynamic range is narrow

If the VOLUME setting is high:

the dynamic range is wide

• The Adaptive DRC setting is effective for headphones.

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will

not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust

the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set

this parameter to “–5.0dB.” The volume increases to the

maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB

(default).

■ Init. Volume

Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When

this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set to a level

that last time this unit is set to standby.

Note

• When you set “Max Volume” and “Init. Volume,” the setting of “Max

Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume”

to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB,” the volume is

automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on.

Changes input source names to be displayed on the front

panel display.

You can select an input source that you want to change the

name to be displayed using nCursor.

Selecting a name to be displayed from templates

Select an input source that you want to change the name,

and select a name from the following templates using

Cursor.

Entering an original name

Select an input source that you want to name, and press

nENTER. You can enter up to 9 characters by selecting

one character at a time with the following keys according

to the following operation.

The following characters are available for input.

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space

You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For

details, see page 36.

Protects settings of setup menu against accidental

alteration.

Note

• When this parameter is switched to “On,” “G” appears while the setup

menu is displayed on the video monitor.

Adjustable range: -5 to 0* to +5

3 Volume

Choices: Auto/Off*

Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB/+16.5dB* (5.0 dB

step)

Choices: Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)

VOLUME: highVOLUME: low

Input levelInput level

Output level

Auto

Off Off

Auto

4 Input Rename

– Blu-ray – Satellite

– DVD – VCR

– SetTopBox – Tape

– Game – MD

– TV – PC

– DVR – iPod

– CD – HD DVD

– CD-R – “blank”

nCursor l / h For selecting characters that you

want to change

nCursor k / n For selecting characters to be

entered

nENTER For entering the selected characters

DSP Parameter

Memory Guard

Choices: Off*/On

Off Not protect settings.

On Protects the settings of the setup menu

(except for the Memory Guard setting).

44 En

You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for

controlling external components are as follows:

dSOURCE POWER

Turns on and off an external component.

nCursor, ENTER, RETURN

Operates the menus of external components.

pDISPLAY

Switches between the screens of external components.

rExternal component operation keys

Function as a recording or playback key of an external

component, or a menu display key.

sNumeric keys

Function as numeric keys of an external component.

tTV control keys

• You can use tTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless

of selected input sources.

• You need to set the remote control code first to control external

components.

• The remote control keys for controlling external components are

available only when the external components have corresponding control

keys.

The following remote control codes are assigned to input

sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

■ Default remote control code settings

“—” indicates no assignment

• An external component that is controlled by the remote control can be

automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (see page 21).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

1 Press cCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.

2 Press gInput selection keys.

3 Enter a remote control code using

sNumeric keys.

Once the remote control code is registered,

bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.

If it fails, bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat

from step 1.

You can clear all the remote control codes previously set,

and reset all of them to the initial factory settings.

1 Press cCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as a tip of a

ballpoint pen.

bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.

2 Press lSETUP on the remote control.

3 Enter “9981” using sNumeric keys.

Once the initialization is complete, bTRANSMIT

on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails,

bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from

step 1.

Controlling other components with the remote control

INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV

MUTE Mute audio of TV

TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV

TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV

POWER Turns on and off TV

Input source Category Manufacturer

Default

code

[HDMI1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018

[HDMI2] — — —

[HDMI3] — — —

[HDMI4] — — —

[AV1] ———

[AV2] ———

[AV3] CD Yamaha 5013

[AV4] ———

[AV5] ———

[AV6] ———

[AUDIO1] — — —

[AUDIO2] — — —

[V-AUX] — — —

[TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007

[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011

[A]/[B] — — —

Setting remote control codes

Resetting all remote control codes

Input source Category Manufacturer

Default

code

45 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In the advanced setup, you can set basic operations of this

unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or

initialize user settings. Perform the following steps to

change settings.

1 Set this unit to the standby mode.

2 Press ASTANDBY/ON while pressing and

holding LSTRAIGHT on the front panel.

The advanced setup menu appears on the front panel

display.

3 Press KPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to

select the parameter you want to change.

The default setting are marked with “*.”

• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an

actual display screen.

SP IMP. -XXX

Selects output impedance of this unit according to

connected speakers.

REMOTE ID -XXX

Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple

Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a

single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to

the same setting.

BI AMP - XXX

Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main

speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.

MON.CHK - XXXX

Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video

monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT

jack.

INIT-XXXXXXXXX

Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can

select an initialization method from the following.

DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field

programs

VIDEO: Video conversion settings (resolution/

aspect) in the setup menu and the OSD

display position

ALL: Reset this unit to initial factory

settings

CANCEL: Cancellation of initialization

4 Press LSTRAIGHT a few times to select the

value you want to change.

The value selected here becomes effective when this

unit is turned on the next time. You can change

multiple settings by repeating steps 3 and 4.

5 Press ASTANDBY/ON, turns off this

system, and press ASTANDBY/ON again.

The value set in step 3 becomes effective, and this

unit turns on. When you select initialization in step 3,

the initialization is performed.

Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If

another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a

different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted

operation of the other amplifier.

ID1 is set for both remote control and amplifier by default.

When you change the remote control ID, display

“Advance Setup” (see the previous section) and change the

ID for the amplifier too.

1 Press cCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

bTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2 Press lSETUP on the remote control.

3 Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1:

Enter “5019” using sNumeric keys.

To switch to ID2:

Enter “5020” using sNumeric keys.

Once the remote control code is registered,

bTRANSMIT blinks twice.

If it fails, bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat

from step 1.

• Initializing the remote control code (see page 44) returns it to ID1.

Advanced setup

Choices: 6 MIN/8 MIN*

Choices: ID1*/ID2

Choices: ON/OFF*

Choices: YES*/SKIP

Choices: DSP PARAM/VIDEO/ALL/CANCEL

ADVANCEDSETUP

Setting a remote control ID

46 En

APPENDIX

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

Troubleshooting

General

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall

outlet.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 45

(When this unit is turned back on and

“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The

protection circuitry has been activated

because this unit was turned on while a

speaker cable was shorted.

Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit

and speakers are connected properly.

This unit cannot be

turned off.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

No sound. “Audio Output” in “1 HDMI” of Function

Setup is set to “TV.”

Select a choice for “Audio Output” (Function

Setup→1HDMI→Audio Output) other than “TV.”

A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the OPTION menu and set “Decoder Mode”

to “Auto.”

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

14-16

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with NINPUT l

/ h or the gInput selection keys on the

remote control.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. —

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Display Signal info of the option menu and check the

input signal format.

If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback

component is properly connected to this unit (or a

proper input source is selected).

If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format

cannot be reproduced by this unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

47 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected

on the monitor.

Select an appropriate video input on the monitor. —

The composite output terminals are used

to output a component video signal, or the

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are used to

output a composite video signal.

If your monitor does not support the HDMI

connection, connect it to the COMPONENT OUT

jacks or the composite output terminals and select an

appropriate video input on the monitor.

This unit outputs the video signals are not

supported on the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Displays the advanced setup menu and select

“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.

Displays the advanced setup menu and set

“MON.CHK” to “YES.”

Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the monitor to this unit via the

COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output

terminals.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 45

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. —

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

The playback component or speakers are

not connected properly.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “B)Level” settings. 41

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When a monaural source sound field

program is applied, sound of all channels

are output from the center speaker for

some surround decoders.

Try another sound field program. 24

No sound is output

from a specific

speaker.

Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,

try the following.

1) Change the input source to another one.

2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not

output from that speaker. Select another sound field

program.

3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on

this unit. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu

and enables output of that speaker.

6, 21, 24,

The volume of that speaker is set to

minimum in Speaker Setup in the Setup

menu.

Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and adjust

the volume (Manual Setup→B)Level).

This unit or speaker is malfunction. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,

connect another speaker and check if sound is output.

If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.

6, 10

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press LSTRAIGHT or the jSTRAIGHT on the

remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode.

Sound may not be output from certain

channels depending on input sources or

sound field programs.

Try another sound field program. 24

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

48 En

Troubleshooting

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in

“Speaker Setup” of the setup menu

(Speaker Setup→Manual

Setup→A)Config) is set to “Front” when

a Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signal is

being played.

Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both.” 39

“LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in

“Speaker Setup” of the setup menu

(Speaker Setup→Manual

Setup→A)Config) is set to “SWFR” or

“Front” when a 2-channel source is being

played.

Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “Both.” 39

The source does not contain low

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Extended Surround” in the OPTION

menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal

does not contain a surround back flag with

“Extended Surround” set to “Auto.”

Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” 40

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format.

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Set the playback component properly referring to its

operating instructions.

—

Noise/hum noise is

heard.

Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this

unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback

component to this unit by digital connection and play

back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,

the problem may results from the playback

component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback

component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip

operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option

menu after selecting the input source and set

“Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”

16, 34

“Memory Guard!” is

displayed and the

setting cannot be

changed.

“Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to

“On.”

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 43

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES!”

appears on the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to other digital or

radio frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

49 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The picture is

disturbed.

The video software is copy-protected.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

HDMI

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —

The connected HDMI component does not

support high-bandwidth digital copyright

protection (HDCP).

Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 15

Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

You are too far from the station

transmitter or the input from the

antenna is weak.

Check the antenna connections. 17

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi-element antenna.

—

Switch to monaural mode. 34

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or

place it in a different location.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

You are in an area far from a station or

an input from the antenna is weak.

Replace an outdoor antenna with more

sensitive multi element antenna.

—

Tune in manually or by direct frequency

tuning.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 17

Use the manual tuning method. 28

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

The noises may be caused by lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,

but it can be reduced by installing and

properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

50 En

Troubleshooting

Note

• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and the OSD, check the connection of your iPod (see

page 16).

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees

offaxis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe

light, etc.) is striking the remote control

sensor of this unit.

Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9

The remote control ID of the remote

control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the

remote control.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

If this unit does not work when you press nCursor,

do the following.

When the key does not work during DVD disc menu

operation: press the gInput selection keys on

the remote control again.

When the key does not work during OPTION menu/

SETUP menu operation: press the key applicable for

the current menu operation again.

—

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

iPod™

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

and then place it back in the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

This unit supports iPod Touch, iPod (Click Wheel),

iPod nano and iPod mini.

—

iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the

Yamaha iPod universal dock.

51 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Notes

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screen appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.

• Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock.

Place your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 16

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod. —

Bluetooth™

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the

Bluetooth component is established.

BT Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected

from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver.

Auto Setup (YPAO)

Before Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 43

During Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not

detected.

Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11

E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround

channels are detected.

Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

52 En

Troubleshooting

E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal

is detected.

If you connect only one surround back speaker,

connect it to the L-side (SINGLE) terminal.

E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed

accurately due to loud ambient noise.

Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

When using surround back speakers, you need to

connect surround L/R speakers.

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was

unplugged during the “Auto Setup”

procedure.

Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto

Setup.”

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not

detect test tones.

Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 18

Check whether the speakers are properly placed and

connected.

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC

jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha

dealer or service center.

E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was cancelled due to an

inappropriate user operation.

Run “Auto Setup” again. 18

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 18

After Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.

If they are correct, the speakers work properly even

when this message is displayed.

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around

the listening position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all

speakers are placed in a similar environment.

—

Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 11

We recommended that you use speakers with the

same or similar specifications.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

53 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term

that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and

video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user

adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and

video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this

synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.

With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted

frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a

much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the

sound in some way.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated

into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the

chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this

system because each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with

component input jacks is required in order to output component

signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed

of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and

synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component

transmits these three elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up

from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.

This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from

millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color

banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between

colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more

shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases

the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the

RGB or YCbCr color space.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels

(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital

provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the

system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate

moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible

than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum

to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-

channel sources.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic

moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-

around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for

high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,

and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital

Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology

enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right

channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels

instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.

There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser

discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround

uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and

dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a

center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for

special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder

built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance

moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering

a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

Glossary

54 En

Glossary

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals

are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of

2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to

reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization

of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality

can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal

audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the

dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD

signals via the HDMI jack.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-

channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with

all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to

the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD

video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks

of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly

gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has

developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in

your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,

and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This

unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-

channel format.

■ DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-

ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.

In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,

enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the

Internet while playing the main program.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including

Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96

kHz audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray

Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio

master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD

Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed

for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing

an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)

and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI

supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-

channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC

HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with

bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and

requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface

that meets the security requirements of content providers and system

operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range

of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as

0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the

full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal

playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.

This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM

system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the

analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while

the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric

value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that

can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while

the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is

determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher

the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be

played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more

finely the sound level can be reproduced.

■ “x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors

that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is

particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

55 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed

for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having

many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound

heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP

provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening

room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm

for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each

sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows

you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any

surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even

possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your

listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a

compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss

of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of

low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance

of the overall sound system.

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio

commentaries mixed down by using the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) connections.

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Notes

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals

directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD

DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• 480i/60 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

Sound field program information

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD

Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

56 En

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 90 W

[Other models]

1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω .......................................................... 90 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 95/110/130/150 W

[Other models]

Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .......................................... 100/110/125 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea, General

and Asia models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................... 115 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 105 W

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]

8 Ω.......................................................................................0.23 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models]

Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ................................. 90 W

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

AV5, etc................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...................................2.0 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

AUDIO OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)

................................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 100 mV/470 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 to FRONT ..................................10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

(1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less

[Other models]

(1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)

............................................................................. 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front Speakers..........................................................150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) ............................ 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control ................................... MUTE / –80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front Speakers)

BASS Boost/Cut....................................................±10 dB at 50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................±10 dB at 20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)

......................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ..........................................................24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .......................NTSC

[Other models]..........................................................................PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ........................... NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video [U.K., Europe and Russia models]

....................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................50 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion Off)

................................................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models].............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................... 74 dB/69 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ..................................................................... 0.3/0.3%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) .......................................................75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ...................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models]...................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General models] ...............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model]...................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model]................................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ...................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia models]................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................270 W/320 VA

[Other models]...................................................................... 280 W

• Standby Power Consumption

Standby through off ....................................................0.2 W or less

Standby through on........................................................3 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] ................................................... 490 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................................435 x 151 x 364 mm

(17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in)

• Weight...................................................................... 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

57 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Numerics

1 Dynamic Range, sound setup ......................41

1 HDMI, function setup .................................42

2 Display, function setup ................................42

2 Lipsync, sound setup ...................................41

2ch Stereo, sound field program ....................25

3 Volume, function setup ...............................43

4 Input Rename, function setup .....................43

5.1-channel speaker layout .............................10

6.1-channel speaker layout .............................10

7.1-channel speaker layout .............................10

7ch Enhancer, sound field program ...............26

7ch Stereo, sound field program ....................26

■ A

A)Config, speaker setup .................................39

Action Game, sound field program ................25

Adaptive DRC, 3 Volume, function setup .....43

Adjusting high frequency sound ....................22

Adjusting low frequency sound .....................22

Advanced setup ..............................................45

Adventure, sound field program ....................24

AM antenna connection .................................17

AM tuning ......................................................28

AM, front panel ................................................4

ANTENNA jack, rear panel .............................5

Aspect, 1 HDMI, function setup ....................42

AUDIO 1/2, rear panel .....................................5

Audio and video player connection ................15

AUDIO jack ...................................................13

Audio jack ......................................................13

AUDIO L/R jack, front panel ...........................4

AUDIO OUT, rear panel ..................................5

Audio Output, 1 HDMI, function setup .........42

Audio player connection ................................16

Auto Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ..............42

Auto Preset, OPTION menu ..........................35

Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ............51

Automatic setup .............................................18

AV 1-6, rear panel ............................................5

AV OUT, rear panel .........................................5

■ B

B)Level, speaker setup ...................................41

Basic operation, setup menu ..........................39

BI-AMP connection switch,

advanced setup ..........................................45

BI-AMP, advanced setup ...............................45

Bluetooth component playback ......................32

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connection .................................................16

Bluetooth, troubleshooting .............................51

■ C

C)Distance, speaker setup ..............................41

C.Image, decoder parameter ..........................37

Cellar Club, sound field program ...................25

Center SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...............40

Center speaker ................................................10

Center width, decoder parameter ...................37

Center, C)Distance, speaker setup .................41

Chamber, sound field program .......................25

CINEMA DSP indicator,

front panel display .......................................6

CINEMA DSP parameter ...............................36

Clear Preset, OPTION menu ..........................35

COAXIAL jack ..............................................13

CODE SET, remote control .............................7

COMPONENT VIDEO jack ..........................13

Connect, OPTION menu ................................35

Connecting AM antenna ................................17

Connecting audio and video player ................15

Connecting audio player ................................16

Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver ......................................................16

Connecting FM antenna .................................17

Connecting iPod universal dock .................... 16

Connecting power cable ................................ 17

Connecting projector ..................................... 14

Connecting set-top box .................................. 15

Connecting speaker ........................................ 11

Connecting speaker cable .............................. 12

Connecting TV monitor ................................. 14

Connection ..................................................... 10

Controlling other component,

remote control ........................................... 44

Crossover Freq., A)Config, speaker setup ..... 40

CT Level, sound field parameter ................... 37

Cursor indicator, front panel display ............... 6

Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control ........... 7

■ D

D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................ 41

Decoder Mode, OPTION menu ..................... 34

Decoder parameter ......................................... 37

Dimension, decoder parameter ...................... 37

Dimmer, 2 Display, function setup ................ 42

DIRECT, front panel ....................................... 4

Direct, sound field parameter ........................ 37

Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................... 35

DISPLAY, remote control ............................... 7

Displaying input signal information .............. 23

DOCK terminal, rear panel .............................. 5

Drama, sound field program .......................... 25

DSP Level, sound field parameter ................. 36

DSP Parameter, setup menu .......................... 43

■ E

E)Test Tone, speaker setup ............................ 41

Editing sound field program .......................... 36

Editing surround decoder ............................... 36

Effect Level, sound field parameter ............... 37

ENTER, remote control ................................... 7

EQ Type Select, D)Equalizer,

speaker setup ............................................. 41

Extended Surround, OPTION menu .............. 34

External component operation key,

remote control ............................................. 7

■ F

FL Scroll, 2 Display, function setup .............. 42

FM antenna connection .................................. 17

FM Mode, OPTION menu ............................. 34

FM tuning ...................................................... 28

FM, front panel ................................................ 4

Frequency tuning ........................................... 28

Front L, C)Distance, speaker setup ................ 41

Front left speaker ........................................... 10

Front panel ....................................................... 4

Front panel display .......................................... 6

Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4

Front R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41

Front right speaker ......................................... 10

Front SP, A)Config, speaker setup ................40

Function setup, setup menu ........................... 42

■ H

Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 25

Hall in Vienna, sound field program .............25

HDMI Auto, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ............. 41

HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6

HDMI information ......................................... 55

HDMI jack ..................................................... 13

HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4, rear panel ................. 5

HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4

HDMI, troubleshooting .................................. 49

Headphones using .......................................... 22

Hi-fi sound playback ...................................... 22

High frequency sound adjustment ................. 22

■ I

INFO, front panel ............................................. 4

INFO, remote control ...................................... 7

INIT, advanced setup .................................... 45

Init. Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ........ 43

Initialize setting, advanced setup .................. 45

INPUT l / h, front panel .............................. 4

Input selection key, remote control ................. 7

Input signal information displaying .............. 23

Input source registration ................................ 21

Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9

iPod playback ................................................ 30

iPod universal dock connection ..................... 16

iPod, troubleshooting .................................... 50

■ L

LFE/Bass Out, A)Config, speaker setup ....... 39

Low frequency sound adjustment ................. 22

■ M

Manual Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ......... 42

Max Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ....... 43

Memory guard, setup menu ........................... 43

MEMORY, front panel ................................... 4

MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 45

MONITOR OUT, rear panel ........................... 5

Mono Movie, sound field program ............... 25

Multi information display,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Music Video, sound field program ................ 25

MUTE indicator, front panel display .............. 6

MUTE, remote control .................................... 7

■ N

Numeric key, remote control ........................... 7

■ O

OPTICAL jack .............................................. 13

OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel ................ 4

OPTION menu .............................................. 33

OPTION, remote control ................................. 7

OSD Shift, 2 Display, function setup ............ 43

■ P

Pairing Bluetooth components ...................... 32

Pairing, OPTION menu ................................. 35

Panorama, decoder parameter ....................... 37

PHONES jack, front panel .............................. 4

Placing speaker .............................................. 10

PORTABLE jack, front panel ......................... 4

Power cable connection ................................. 17

Power Cable, rear panel .................................. 5

POWER, remote control ................................. 7

PRE OUT, rear panel ...................................... 5

PRESET l / h, front panel ........................... 4

Preset tuning .................................................. 28

PROGRAM l / h, front panel ...................... 4

Projector connection ...................................... 14

■ R

Registering input source ................................ 21

Registering sound field program ................... 21

Remote control ................................................ 7

Remote control code resetting ....................... 44

Remote control code setting .......................... 44

Remote control ID, advanced setup .............. 45

Remote control signal transmitter,

remote control ............................................. 7

Remote control, controlling other

component ................................................ 44

Remote control, preparation ............................ 9

Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 50

REMOTE ID, advanced setup ....................... 45

Repeat playback, iPod ................................... 31

Repeat, OPTION menu ................................. 35

Resetting remote control code ....................... 44

Resolution, 1 HDMI, function setup ............. 42

RETURN, remote control ............................... 7

Index

58 En

Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 25

■ S

SB Level, sound field parameter ................... 37

SCENE function ............................................ 21

SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4

SCENE, remote control ................................... 7

Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 24

Selecting SCENE ........................................... 21

Setting remote control code ........................... 44

Set-top box connection .................................. 15

Setup menu .................................................... 38

Setup menu basic operation ........................... 39

SETUP, remote control ................................... 7

Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 31

Shuffle, OPTION menu ................................. 35

Signal Info parameter .................................... 34

Signal Info, OPTION menu ........................... 34

SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 27

SL Level, sound field parameter .................... 37

SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6

Sleep timer ..................................................... 22

SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7

Sound field parameter .................................... 36

Sound field program editing .......................... 36

Sound field program registration ................... 21

Sound selection key, remote control ................ 7

Sound setup, setup menu ............................... 41

SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7

SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 45

Speaker cable connection .............................. 12

Speaker connection ........................................ 11

Speaker impedance, advanced setup ............. 45

Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6

Speaker layout ............................................... 10

Speaker placement ......................................... 10

Speaker setup ................................................. 39

SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5

Specifications ................................................ 56

Spectacle, sound field program ..................... 24

Sports, sound field program .......................... 25

SR Level, sound field parameter ................... 37

Standard, sound field program ....................... 24

Standby Through, 1 HDMI,

function setup ............................................ 42

STANDBY/ON, front panel ............................ 4

Straight decoding mode ................................. 27

Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 26

STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4

Subwoofer ...................................................... 10

Subwoofer Phase, A)Config,

speaker setup ............................................. 40

Sur. L, C)Distance, speaker setup .................. 41

Sur. L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ........... 40

Sur. R, C)Distance, speaker setup ................. 41

Sur.B L, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41

Sur.B L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ........ 40

Sur.B R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41

Surround back left speaker ............................ 10

Surround back right speaker .......................... 10

Surround back speaker ................................... 10

Surround decoder editing ............................... 36

Surround left speaker ..................................... 10

Surround right speaker ................................... 10

SWFR, C)Distance, speaker setup ................. 41

■ T

The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 25

The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ........ 25

Tone control ................................................... 22

TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4

TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7

Troubleshooting ............................................. 46

Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6

Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7

Tuner, troubleshooting .................................. 49

TUNING l / h, front panel .......................... 4

Tuning, AM ................................................... 28

Tuning, FM .................................................... 28

Turning off .....................................................17

Turning on ......................................................17

TV control key, remote control ........................7

TV monitor connection ..................................14

■ U

Using the remote control ..................................9

■ V

VIDEO jack ....................................................13

Video jack ......................................................13

VIDEO jack, front panel ..................................4

Video/audio jack ............................................13

Virtual CINEMA DSP ...................................27

VOLUME +/-, remote control .........................7

VOLUME control, front panel .........................4

VOLUME indicator, front panel display .........6

Volume Trim, OPTION menu .......................33

■ Y

YPAO .............................................................18

YPAO, troubleshooting ..................................51

“ASTANDBY/ON” or

“fPOWER” (example) indicates

the name of the parts on the front

panel or the remote control. Refer

to “Part names and functions” on

page 4.

List of remote control codes

A.R. Systems 0274

Acme 0260

Acura 0261, 0273

ADC 0259

Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257,

0258, 0259, 0264,

0265

Advent 0204

Adventura 0107

Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328

Agashi 0327, 0328

Agazi 0259

Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Aim 0274

Aiwa 0028, 0297

Akai 0063, 0096, 0101,

0205, 0231, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Akiba 0262, 0274

Akura 0259, 0262, 0273,

0274

Alaron 0327

Alba 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0266, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0294, 0300, 0327

Albatron 0222

Alcyon 0249

Alleron 0105

Allorgan 0328

Allstar 0268, 0274

America Action

0225

AMOi 0326

Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275,

0328

Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273, 0274

Amtron 0104

Anam 0225, 0261

Anam National

0102, 0104

Anglo 0261, 0273

Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261,

0273, 0274

Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261,

0263, 0273, 0274

AOC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Apex 0061, 0117, 0139

Arcam 0327, 0328

Arcam Delta 0260

Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274

Arthur Martin 0275

ASA 0257, 0265

Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274

Astra 0261

Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262,

0327, 0328

Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Atori 0261, 0273

Auchan 0275

Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328

Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225

Ausind 0249

Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259,

0260, 0328

Aventura 0097

Awa 0327, 0328

Axion 0206

Baird 0328

Bang & Olufsen

0230, 0257

Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Bastide 0260, 0328

Baur 0271, 0274

Bazin 0328

Beko 0243, 0269, 0274,

0282, 0351, 0357,

0372, 0380

Belcor 0090

Bell & Howell

0065, 0100

Benq 0051, 0160, 0315

Beon 0268, 0271, 0274

Best 0243

Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274

Binatone 0260, 0328

Blue Sky 0262, 0274

Blue Star 0270

Boots 0260, 0328

BPL 0270, 0274

Bradford 0104, 0225

Brandt 0267, 0272

Brillian 0228

Brinkmann 0274

Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274

Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328

Brockwood 0090

Broksonic 0063, 0225

Bruns 0257

BTC 0262

Bush 0261, 0262, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0270,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0282, 0286, 0294,

0300, 0328, 0329,

0351, 0388, 0394,

0413

Candle 0072, 0090, 0096,

0107

Capsonic 0259

Carena 0274

Carnivale 0096

Carrefour 0266

Carver 0088

Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274

Casio 0317

Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274

CCE 0229, 0328

Celebrity 0057, 0101

Celera 0117

Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274

Century 0257

CGE 0243, 0249

Changhong 0117

Chimei 0323

Cimline 0261, 0273

Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0104

City 0261, 0273

Clarion 0225

Clarivox 0271

Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259,

0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0269, 0273,

0274, 0328

CMS 0327

CMS Hightec 0328

Coby 0151

Colortyme 0072, 0090

Commercial Solutions

0071

Concerto 0072, 0090

Concorde 0261, 0273

Condor 0243, 0260, 0268,

0269, 0273, 0274,

0327

Contec 0225, 0260, 0261,

0266, 0273, 0327

Contec/Cony 0094, 0104

Continental Edison

0267

Cosmel 0261, 0273

Craig 0104, 0225

Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249,

0257

Crown 0104, 0225, 0243,

0249, 0261, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0273,

0274

CS Electronics

0260, 0262, 0327

CTC Clatronic

0263

CTX 0159

Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,

0085, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0099, 0224

CXC 0104, 0225

Cybertron 0262

Cytron 0202

Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103, 0119, 0245,

0260, 0261, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0281,

0285, 0303, 0321,

0327, 0328, 0344,

0361, 0387

Dainichi 0262, 0327

Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Dantax 0243, 0271

Dawa 0274

Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090,

0261, 0273

De Graaf 0264

Decca 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Dell 0167, 0195

Denver 0308, 0312

Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274

Diamant 0274

Diamond 0327

DiamondVision

0213, 0221

Dimensia 0099

Disney 0137

Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Dream Vision 0415, 0416

DTS 0261, 0273

Dual 0260, 0274, 0328

Dual-Tec 0260, 0261

Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108,

0257, 0260, 0263,

0328

Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,

0225

Dux 0271

Dwin 0224

Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274

Dynex 0181, 0182

Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0328

Elcit 0257

Electa 0270

ELECTRO TECH

0261

Electroband 0057, 0101

Electrograph 0226

Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,

0102

Element 0180

Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327

Elite 0262, 0268, 0274

Elman 0263

Elta 0261, 0273, 0327

Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,

0082, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0095, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0119,

0225, 0243, 0257,

0274

Emprex 0200

Envision 0072, 0090, 0096

Epson 0156, 0201, 0309

Erres 0268, 0271, 0274

ESA 0097

ESC 0328

Etron 0261

Eurofeel 0328

Euro-Feel 0259

Euroline 0271

Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328

Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,

0274

Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,

0274, 0327, 0328

Expert 0275

Exquisit 0274

Fenner 0261, 0273

Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272

Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,

0327

Filsai 0328

Finlandia 0264

Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268

Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,

0260, 0266, 0269,

0328

Flint 0268, 0274

Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,

0260, 0271, 0327

Formenti/Phoenix

0327

Fortress 0257, 0258

Fraba 0243, 0274

Friac 0243

Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,

0265, 0273, 0328

Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,

0105, 0328

Fujitsu General

0328

Fujitsu Siemens

0425, 0426, 0427,

0428, 0429

Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,

0036, 0037, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0225,

0259

Futuretech 0104, 0225

Galaxi 0269, 0274

Galaxis 0243, 0274

Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227

GBC 0261, 0266, 0273

GE 0069, 0071, 0072,

0073, 0077, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0106,

0112, 0131

Geant Casino 0275

GEC 0260, 0265, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273

General Technic

0261, 0273

Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268,

0274

GFM 0177, 0210

Giant 0328

Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096,

0108

GoldHand 0327

Goldline 0274

GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0260,

0261, 0264, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0322,

0328, 0395, 0399,

0412

Gorenje 0243, 0269

GPM 0262

GPX 0211

Gradiente 0162

Graetz 0265

Granada 0249, 0260, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0275, 0328

Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270,

0271

Gronic 0328

Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249,

0274, 0356

Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225

Haier 0187, 0207

Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327,

0328

Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090

Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328

Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260,

0261, 0266, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274

Hantor 0274

Harman/Kardon

0088

Harvard 0104, 0225

Harwood 0273, 0274

Havermy 0224

HCM 0259, 0260, 0261,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hema 0273, 0328

Hewlett Packard

0146

Higashi 0327

HiLine 0274

Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275

Hisense 0165

Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,

0016, 0042, 0072,

0090, 0094, 0173,

0254, 0255, 0256,

0260, 0264, 0265,

0266, 0274, 0285,

0300, 0319, 0328,

0348, 0349, 0385,

0402, 0410

Hornyphon 0268, 0274

Hoshai 0262

Huanyu 0260, 0327

Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328

Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273,

0327, 0328

Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268,

0270, 0271, 0274,

0275, 0328

Hyundai 0223

Iberia 0274

ICE 0259, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

ICeS 0327

Ilo 0198, 0203

IMA 0104

Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0269, 0274

Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274

Infinity 0088

InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313,

0397, 0430

Ingelen 0265

Ingersol 0261, 0273

Initial 0203

Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Innovation 0259, 0261

Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190,

0209

Inteq 0076

Interactive 0243

Interbuy 0261, 0273

Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265,

0268, 0271, 0274

International 0327

Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260,

0263, 0274, 0328

Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Isukai 0262, 0274

ITC 0260, 0328

ITS 0262, 0268, 0270,

0274, 0327

ITT 0261, 0265

ITV 0261, 0271, 0274

Janeil 0107

JBL 0088

JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085,

0090, 0099, 0103,

0106

JCB 0057, 0101

Jensen 0072, 0090

JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,

0092, 0093, 0094,

0106, 0251, 0252,

0266, 0268, 0293,

0360, 0379

Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Kamosonic 0260

Kamp 0260, 0327

Kapsch 0265

Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261,

0271, 0274

Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101,

0327

KEC 0225

Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264,

0274

Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096

KIC 0328

Kingsley 0260, 0327

KLH 0117

Kloss Novabeam

0104, 0107

Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274

Kolster 0268, 0274

Konka 0262

Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274

Korting 0243, 0257

Kosmos 0274

Koyoda 0261

KTV 0085, 0096, 0104,

0225, 0229, 0260,

0328

Kyoto 0327, 0328

Lasat 0243

Lenco 0261, 0273

Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273

Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274

LG 0016, 0038, 0039,

0077, 0103, 0145,

0222, 0243, 0246,

0253, 0260, 0261,

0264, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0282,

0290, 0299, 0316,

0327, 0328, 0351,

0359, 0367, 0382,

0384, 0389, 0396

LG/GoldStar 0246

Liesenk 0271

Liesenkotter 0274

Life 0259, 0261

Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273,

0274

Lloyds 0273

Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0280, 0306, 0347

Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271

Logik 0100

Luma 0264, 0271, 0273,

0274

Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Lux May 0268

Luxman 0072, 0090

Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328

LXI 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0099

M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271

MAG 0050

Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271

Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0095, 0096,

0098, 0114, 0115,

0129, 0134, 0176,

0178, 0189, 0210

Magnum 0259, 0261

Majestic 0100

Mandor 0259

Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0158, 0268,

0271, 0274

Marelli 0257

Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Masuda 0328

Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328,

0405

Matsushita 0067

Maxent 0193, 0226

Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274

Medion 0259, 0261, 0274

Megapower 0222

Megatron 0072, 0077

MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Melvox 0275

Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,

0100, 0103, 0133,

0219, 0261, 0273

Memphis 0261, 0273

Mercury 0273, 0274

Metz 0257

MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,

0096, 0103

Micromaxx 0259, 0261

Microstar 0259, 0261

Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,

0076, 0085, 0106,

0108

Minerva 0249

Minoka 0268, 0274

Mintek 0203

Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,

0048, 0072, 0077,

0090, 0103, 0196,

0224, 0257, 0266,

0268, 0274, 0298,

0371

Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,

0260, 0327, 0328

Monivision 0222

Montgomery Ward

0100

Motion 0249

Motorola 0102, 0224

MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0327

Multi System 0271

Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,

0243, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0264, 0266,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Murphy 0260, 0327

NAD 0061, 0072, 0077

Naonis 0264

NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,

0090, 0096, 0102,

0103, 0266, 0328

iii

Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260,

0264, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0274, 0328

NEI 0268, 0271, 0274

Net-TV 0226

Neufunk 0273, 0274

New Tech 0261, 0268

New World 0262

NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328

Nicamagic 0260, 0327

Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096

Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Nokia 0265

Norcent 0155

Nordic 0328

Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267,

0268

Nordvision 0271

Novatronic 0274

Oceanic 0265, 0275

Okano 0243, 0269, 0274

Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149,

0154, 0157

ONCEAS 0260

Onwa 0104, 0225

Opera 0274

Oppo 0208

Optimus 0065, 0067

Optoma 0194

Optonica 0224

Orbit 0268, 0274

Orion 0121, 0192, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0282, 0329

Orline 0274

Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262,

0274, 0328

Oso 0262

Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,

0268, 0270, 0271,

0274, 0328

Pael 0260, 0327

Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269,

0274, 0328

Palsonic 0328

Panama 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066,

0067, 0068, 0069,

0070, 0102, 0106,

0113, 0147, 0215,

0241, 0265, 0274,

0279, 0310, 0332,

0334, 0368, 0374

Panavision 0274

Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,

0275, 0327

Pausa 0261, 0273

Penney 0061, 0069, 0071,

0077, 0096

Perdio 0274, 0327

Perfekt 0274

Philco 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0094, 0096,

0102, 0103, 0243,

0249, 0257, 0274

Philharmonic 0260, 0328

Philips 0040, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0094,

0098, 0099, 0102,

0114, 0135, 0143,

0176, 0178, 0189,

0210, 0212, 0232,

0233, 0257, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0278, 0287, 0301,

0302, 0307, 0311,

0314, 0330, 0331,

0333, 0337, 0338,

0339, 0341, 0343,

0345, 0355, 0363,

0365, 0377, 0378,

0381, 0383, 0406,

0409, 0414

Philips Magnavox

0089, 0114, 0115

Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0327

Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096

Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072,

0090, 0243, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0408

Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273,

0274

Playsonic 0328

Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184,

0220

Poppy 0261, 0273

Portland 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103

Prandoni-Prince

0249, 0264

Precision 0260, 0328

Prima 0161, 0207, 0261,

0265, 0273

Princeton 0222

Prism 0069, 0106

Profex 0261, 0273

Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274

Proline 0268, 0274

Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099

Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Protech 0259, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0328

Proton 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094

Protron 0150

PROVIEW 0050, 0164

Provision 0271, 0274

Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108

Pye 0268, 0271, 0274,

0296, 0338

Pymi 0261, 0273

Quandra Vision

0275

Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102,

0106

Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Questa 0266

Radialva 0274

RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077,

0096, 0225, 0274

RadioShack/Realistic

0072, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0099, 0104

Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Radiomarelli 0257, 0274

Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273,

0274

Rank 0266

RCA 0071, 0072, 0073,

0074, 0075, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0103,

0109, 0120, 0179,

0218

Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096,

0225

Recor 0274

Redstar 0274

Reflex 0274

Revox 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Rex 0259, 0264, 0265

RFT 0243, 0250, 0257

Rhapsody 0327

R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274

Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273

Robotron 0257

Rowa 0327, 0328

Royal Lux 0243

RTF 0257

Runco 0076, 0096, 0108

Saba 0257, 0265, 0267,

0272, 0376

Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0328

Salora 0264, 0265

Sambers 0249, 0263

Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0226

Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,

0032, 0044, 0045,

0046, 0047, 0072,

0077, 0084, 0085,

0086, 0087, 0090,

0094, 0096, 0103,

0118, 0217, 0229,

0235, 0236, 0237,

0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0284, 0295, 0327,

0328, 0336, 0346,

0390, 0407

Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328

Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268,

0274

Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,

0049, 0065, 0090,

0141, 0191, 0243,

0250, 0260, 0266,

0273, 0291, 0327,

0328, 0370, 0373,

0391

SBR 0271, 0274

Sceptre 0166, 0185

Schaub Lorenz

0265

Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0287,

0300, 0328, 0364,

0366

Scotch 0072, 0077

Scott 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094, 0104, 0105,

0199, 0225

Sears 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0090, 0097,

0099, 0105

SEG 0259, 0260, 0263,

0266, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0300, 0327,

0328

SEI 0274

SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265

Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266

Sencora 0261, 0273

Sentra 0273

Serino 0327

Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,

0072, 0080, 0081,

0082, 0083, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0110,

0148, 0183, 0216,

0224, 0247, 0248,

0258, 0266, 0288,

0304, 0324, 0325,

0340, 0358, 0362,

0369, 0386, 0392,

0398, 0400, 0401,

0403

Sheng Chia 0224

Shogun 0090

Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274

Sierra 0268, 0274

Siesta 0243

Signature 0100

Silva 0327

Silver 0266

Singer 0257, 0263, 0275

Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,

0274

Skantic 0265

Solavox 0265

Sonitron 0243, 0328

Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0328

Sonolor 0265, 0275

Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,

0059, 0060, 0101,

0116, 0125, 0126,

0127, 0142, 0169,

0170, 0171, 0172,

0174, 0234, 0261,

0266, 0276, 0289,

0292, 0393, 0411

Sound & Vision

0262, 0263

Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,

0104, 0105, 0225

Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274

Squareview 0097

SSS 0090, 0104, 0225

Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0273, 0274,

0328

Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,

0273, 0274

Stenway 0270

Stern 0264, 0265

Strato 0273, 0274

Stylandia 0328

Sunkai 0261

Sunstar 0273, 0274

Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,

0274

Superla 0260, 0327, 0328

Superscan 0095, 0224

SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327

Supra 0261, 0273

Supre-Macy 0107

Supreme 0057, 0101

Susumu 0262

Sutron 0261, 0273

SVA 0197

Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328

Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0095,

0096, 0097, 0098,

0175, 0177, 0210

Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108,

0133, 0210, 0225

Syntax 0149

Syntax-Brillian

0149

Sysline 0271

Sytong 0327

Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260,

0262, 0265, 0328

Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266,

0327, 0328

Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

TCM 0259, 0261

Teac 0274, 0328

Tec 0260, 0261, 0273,

0328

Technics 0067, 0069, 0106

TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418,

0419

Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090,

0106

TEDELEX 0328

Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088,

0090, 0094, 0100,

0103, 0104, 0105,

0225

Teleavia 0267

Telecor 0274, 0328

Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272,

0274

Telegazi 0274

Telemeister 0274

Telesonic 0274

Telestar 0274

Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Teleton 0260, 0328

Televideon 0327

Televiso 0275

Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Tesmet 0268

Tevion 0259, 0261

Texet 0260, 0273, 0327,

0328

Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240,

0260, 0267, 0268,

0272, 0274, 0335

Thorn 0271, 0274

TMK 0072, 0077, 0090

TNCi 0076

Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328

Tokyo 0260, 0327

Tomashi 0270

Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,

0054, 0061, 0062,

0063, 0064, 0065,

0122, 0123, 0124,

0128, 0130, 0132,

0139, 0214, 0244,

0266, 0283, 0305,

0328, 0329, 0342,

0350, 0352, 0353,

0354, 0375, 0404

Totevision 0085

Towada 0265, 0328

Trakton 0328

Trans Continens

0274, 0328

Transtec 0327

Trident 0328

Triumph 0274

Uher 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0274

Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263,

0274, 0327

Unic Line 0274

United 0271

Universum 0243, 0249, 0259,

0268, 0269, 0271,

0274, 0328

Univox 0274

Vector Research

0096

Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0274,

0328

Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Victor 0093, 0266, 0268

VIDEOLOGIC

0327

Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,

0328

VideoSystem 0268, 0274

Videotechnic 0327, 0328

Vidikron 0088

Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090,

0103

Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226,

0318

Viking 0107

Viore 0198

Visiola 0260, 0327

Vision 0268, 0274, 0328

Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160,

0227, 0420, 0421,

0422, 0423, 0424

Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274

Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264,

0265, 0268, 0274

Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328

Wards 0072, 0077, 0088,

0090, 0091, 0096,

0098, 0099, 0100,

0103, 0105

Watson 0268, 0271, 0274

Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327

Waycon 0061

Wega 0257, 0266, 0274

Wegavox 0273

Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142

White Westinghouse

0008, 0119, 0260,

0263, 0271, 0274,

0327

Wincom 0055, 0056

Xrypton 0274

Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0004, 0005,

0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Yamishi 0274, 0328

Yokan 0274

Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Yorx 0262

Zanussi 0264, 0328

Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078,

0079, 0090, 0100,

0108, 0111

VCR

ABS 1066

Adventura 1023

Adyson 1090

Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073,

1074

Akai 1071, 1073

Akiba 1079, 1090

Akura 1073, 1079, 1090

Alba 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Alienware 1066

Ambassador 1076

American High

1022

Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091

Anitech 1079, 1090

Apex 1010

ASA 1077, 1078

Asha 1020

Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090

Audio Dynamics

1018

Audiosonic 1091

Audiovox 1021

Baird 1072, 1073, 1075,

1091

Bang & Olufsen

1067

Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Baur 1078

Beaumark 1020

Bell & Howell

1019

Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091

Black Panther Line

1075, 1091

Blaupunkt 1078

Bondstec 1076, 1090

Broksonic 1054

Bush 1074, 1075, 1079,

1090, 1091, 1097,

1099, 1109, 1139

Calix 1021

Candle 1020, 1021

Canon 1022

Cathay 1091

Catron 1076

CGE 1072, 1073

Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090

CineVision 1058

Citizen 1020, 1021

Clatronic 1076, 1090

Colortyme 1018

Condor 1075, 1076, 1091

Craig 1020, 1021

Crown 1075, 1076, 1079,

1090, 1091

Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022

Cybernex 1020

CyberPower 1066

Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076,

1091, 1116, 1141

Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091

Dantax 1074

Daytron 1075, 1091

DBX 1018

De Graaf 1078

Decca 1072, 1073, 1078

Dell 1066

Denko 1090

DiamondVision

1050

DigiFusion 1092

DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040,

1059, 1060, 1061,

1065

Dish Network 1064

Dishpro 1064

Dual 1073, 1078, 1091

Dumont 1072, 1078

Durabrand 1032

Dynatech 1023

Echostar 1064

Elbe 1091

Elcatech 1090

Electrohome 1021

Electrophonic 1021

Elsay 1090

Elta 1079, 1090, 1091

Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,

1070, 1090

ESC 1075, 1091

Etzuko 1079, 1090

Expressvu 1064

Ferguson 1073

Fidelity 1072, 1090

Finlandia 1078

Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078

Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,

1090

Fisher 1019

Flint 1074

Formenti/Phoenix

1078

Frontech 1076

Fuji 1022

Fujitsu 1072

Funai 1023, 1072

Galaxy 1072

Garrard 1023

Gateway 1066

GBC 1076, 1079

GE 1020, 1022

GEC 1078

Geloso 1079

General 1076

General Technic

1074

GOI 1064

GoldHand 1079, 1090

Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,

1077

Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Gradiente 1023

Graetz 1073

Granada 1078

Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Grundig 1078, 1079

Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091

Harley Davidson

1023

Harman/Kardon

1018

Harwood 1090

HCM 1079, 1090

Headquarter 1019

Hewlett Packard

1066

Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

Hisawa 1074

Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,

1089, 1108, 1124

HNS 1060

Howard Computers

1066

HP 1066

HTS 1064

Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061

Hughes Network Systems

1038, 1060

Humax 1035, 1060, 1094

Hush 1066

Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

iBUYPOWER 1066

Impego 1076

Imperial 1072

Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Innovation 1074

Instant Replay 1022

Interbuy 1077, 1090

Interfunk 1078

Intervision 1072, 1091

Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090

ITT 1073

ITV 1075, 1077, 1091

JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020,

1021, 1022

JCL 1022

JVC 1011, 1012, 1013,

1014, 1015, 1016,

1017, 1018, 1019,

1028, 1035, 1064,

1073, 1085, 1117,

1130, 1131, 1133,

1134, 1135, 1136

Kaisui 1079, 1090

Karcher 1078

Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076,

1090

Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073

Kodak 1021, 1022

Korpel 1079, 1090

Kyoto 1090

Lenco 1075

Leyco 1079, 1090

LG 1021, 1053, 1072,

1077, 1088, 1100,

1106, 1125, 1143

Lifetec 1074

Linksys 1066

Lloyd’s 1023

Loewe Opta 1077, 1078

Logik 1079, 1090

Lumatron 1075, 1091

Luxor 1090

LXI 1021

M Electronic 1072

Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044,

1070

Magnin 1021

Manesth 1079, 1090

Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022,

1078

Mark 1091

Marta 1021

Matsui 1074, 1077

Matsushita 1022

Media Center PC

1066

Mediator 1078

Medion 1074

MEI 1022

Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023, 1032,

1048, 1069, 1072,

1077

Memphis 1079, 1090

MGN Technology

1020

Micromaxx 1074

Microsoft 1066

Microstar 1074

Migros 1072

Mind 1066

Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078

Motorola 1022

MTC 1020

Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072,

1076, 1078, 1079,

1090

Murphy 1072

NEC 1018, 1019, 1073

Neckermann 1073, 1078

NEI 1078

Nesco 1079, 1090

Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091

Nikko 1021

Niveus Media 1066

Noblex 1020

Nokia 1073, 1091

Nordmende 1073

Northgate 1066

Oceanic 1072, 1073

Okano 1074, 1090, 1091

Olympus 1022

Optimus 1021

Orion 1033, 1069, 1074,

1097, 1139

Orson 1072

Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Otto Versand 1078

Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079,

1090

Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009,

1022, 1026, 1042,

1043, 1068, 1082,

1101, 1126, 1132

Pathe Marconi 1073

Perdio 1072

Philco 1022, 1090

Philips 1022, 1030, 1035,

1038, 1039, 1040,

1044, 1055, 1060,

1078, 1084, 1095,

1096, 1104, 1105,

1111, 1113, 1122,

1124, 1127, 1128,

1129

Philips Magnavox

1030

Phonola 1078

Pilot 1021

Pioneer 1078, 1118

Polaroid 1010, 1049

Portland 1075, 1076, 1091

Prinz 1072

Profex 1079

Proline 1072

Proscan 1065

Prosonic 1074, 1091

Pulsar 1032

Pye 1052, 1078

Quarter 1019

Quartz 1019

Quasar 1022

Quelle 1072, 1078

Radialva 1090

RadioShack 1021

RadioShack/Realistic

1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

Radiola 1078

Radix 1021

Randex 1021

RCA 1020, 1022, 1025,

1035, 1040, 1047,

1060, 1065

Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

ReplayTV 1041, 1068

Rex 1073

RFT 1076, 1078, 1090

Ricavision 1066

Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079,

1090, 1091

Royal 1090

Runco 1032

Saba 1073

Saisho 1074, 1079

Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038,

1040, 1046, 1060,

1080, 1107, 1110,

1112, 1121, 1123,

1140, 1142

Samurai 1076, 1090

Sanky 1032

Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069,

1073

Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114

Saville 1091

SBR 1078

Schaub Lorenz

1072, 1073

Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075,

1076, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Sears 1019, 1021, 1022

SEG 1079, 1090, 1091

SEI-Sinudyne 1078

Seleco 1073

Sentra 1076, 1090

Sentron 1079, 1090

Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057,

1081, 1115, 1137

Shintom 1079, 1090

Shivaki 1077

Shogun 1020

Siemens 1077

Silva 1077

Silver 1091

Singer 1022

Sinudyne 1078

Solavox 1076

Sonic Blue 1041, 1068

Sonneclair 1090

Sonoko 1075, 1091

Sontec 1077

Sony 1000, 1001, 1002,

1003, 1024, 1027,

1036, 1062, 1066,

1083, 1098, 1103,

1138

Stack 1066

Stack 9 1066

Standard 1075, 1091

Stern 1091

STS 1022

Sunkai 1074

Sunstar 1072

Suntronic 1072

Sunwood 1079, 1090

Superscan 1070

Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044,

1052, 1070

Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090

Systemax 1066

Tagar System s 1066

Taisho 1074

Tandberg 1091

Tandy 1019

Tashiko 1021, 1072

Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078

TCM 1074, 1093, 1120

Teac 1023, 1091

Tec 1076, 1090, 1091

Technics 1022

Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023

Teleavia 1073

Telefunken 1073

Teletech 1090, 1091

Tenosal 1079, 1090

Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Tevion 1074

Thomson 1073, 1087

Thorn 1073

Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,

1039, 1040, 1060,

1061, 1062

TMK 1020

Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090

Tonsai 1079

Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,

1051, 1063, 1066,

1073, 1078, 1086,

1099, 1102, 1119,

1144

Totevision 1020, 1021

Touch 1066

Towada 1079, 1090

Towika 1079, 1090

TVA 1076

Uher 1077

UltimateTV 1065

Ultravox 1091

Unitech 1020

United Quick Star

1075, 1091

Universum 1072, 1077, 1078

Vector Research

1018

Video Concepts

1018

Videon 1074

Videosonic 1020

Viewsonic 1066

Voodoo 1066

Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,

1023

Weltblick 1077

XR-1000 1022, 1023

Yamaha 1018, 1019

Yamishi 1079, 1090

Yokan 1079, 1090

Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,

1090

Zenith 1032

ZT Group 1066

DVD

4Kus 2097

Accurian 2220

Advent 2169, 2201

AEG 2312

Airis 2318

Aiwa 2272

Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,

2227

Akura 2310

Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,

2259, 2264

Alco 2199

Alize 2315

Allegro 2215

Amitech 2312

Amphion MediaWorks

2145

AMW 2145, 2313

Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,

2047, 2076, 2208,

2209

Apple 2163

Arrgo 2216

Asono 2318

Aspire 2140, 2202

Astar 2162

ATACOM 2318

Audiovox 2111, 2199

Avious 2317

Awa 2313

Axion 2171

Bang & Olufsen

2210

Baze 2317

BBK 2318

Bellagio 2313

Best Buy 2309

Blaupunkt 2209

Blue Parade 2207

Boghe 2300

Brainwave 2312

Brandt 2198, 2238

Broksonic 2192, 2195

Bush 2018, 2060, 2248,

2264, 2301, 2308,

2317, 2350, 2368

California Audio Labs

2197

Cambridge Audio

2304

CAT 2306, 2307

CAVS 2146

Centrum 2307

CGV 2304, 2312

Changhong 2222

Cinetec 2313

CineVision 2191, 2215

Clatronic 2308, 2317

Coby 2077, 2124, 2314

Conia 2301

Continental Edison

2313

Crown 2312

C-Tech 2305

Curtis Mathes 2217

CVG 2299

CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216,

2233, 2258

Cytron 2166

Daenyx 2313

Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280,

2299, 2312, 2313,

2326, 2376

Daewoo International

2313

Dalton 2311

Dansai 2303, 2312

Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313

Dayton 2313

DEC 2308

Decca 2312

Denon 2105, 2147, 2197,

2286

Denver 2288, 2308, 2310,

2314

Denzel 2302

Desay 2159

Diamond 2304, 2305

DiamondVision

2179, 2186

Disney 2078, 2088

DK Digital 2257

Dmtech 2226

Dual 2302

Durabrand 2218

DVX 2305

Easy Home 2309

Eclipse 2304

E-Dem 2318

Electrohome 2312

Elin 2312

Elta 2263, 2312, 2315

Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219

Enterprise 2211

Enzer 2302

Epson 2165

ESA 2219

Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317

Fintec 2299

Fisher 2212

Funai 2219

Gateway 2097

GE 2079, 2206, 2209

Gericom 2269

GFM 2176

Giec 2300

Global Solutions

2305

Global Sphere 2305

Go Video 2135, 2215

Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298,

2300, 2308, 2330,

2369

GPX 2177

Gradiente 2197

Graetz 2302

Greenhill 2209

Grundig 2271

Grunkel 2312, 2316

GVG 2299

H&B 2308

H_her 2318

Haaz 2304, 2305

Haier 2172

Harman/Kardon

2125, 2213

HiMAX 2309

Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108,

2302, 2309, 2320,

2366

Hiteker 2208

Home Tech Industries

2318

Hyundai 2316

Ilo 2167

Initial 2167, 2209

Innovation 2228

Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219

Integra 2207

Irradio 2103

iSymphony 2164

JBL 2213

JVC 2049, 2050, 2051,

2052, 2053, 2054,

2055, 2056, 2057,

2070, 2242, 2261,

2275, 2276, 2277,

2278, 2339, 2340,

2341, 2342, 2386,

2387, 2389, 2390,

2391

Jwin 2148

Kansai 2314

Kawasaki 2199

Kennex 2312

Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270

KeyPlug 2312

Kiiro 2312

Kingavon 2308

Kiss 2302

KLH 2199, 2209

Koda 2308

Koss 2095, 2198, 2204

KXD 2309

Landel 2221

Lasonic 2214

Lawson 2305

Lecson 2303

Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317

Lenoxx 2203, 2218

LG 2080, 2107, 2115,

2116, 2141, 2188,

2211, 2215, 2237,

2239, 2285, 2293,

2295, 2348, 2370

Life 2228

Lifetec 2228

Limit 2305

Liquid Video 2204

Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220

Loewe 2274

LogicLab 2305

Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178,

2180, 2196, 2205,

2219, 2308

Magnex 2317

Majestic 2314

Marantz 2282

Marquant 2312

Matsui 2198, 2296

McIntosh 2149

Mecotek 2312

Medion 2228

Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195

MiCO 2300, 2304

Micromaxx 2228

Microsoft 2206

Microstar 2228

Minoka 2312

Minowa 2317

Mintek 2167, 2209

Mitsubishi 2081

Mizuda 2308, 2309

Monyka 2302

Mustek 2232

Mx Onda 2304

Mystral 2316

Naiko 2312

Nesa 2209

Neufunk 2302

Nevir 2312

Next Base 2221

Nexxtech 2161

NU-TEC 2301

Onkyo 2205, 2290

Oopla 2097

Oppo 2150, 2173

Optim 2303

Optimus 2230

Orava 2308

Orbit 2313

Orion 2027, 2060

Oritron 2198, 2204

P&B 2308

Pacific 2305

Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,

2036, 2037, 2038,

2039, 2040, 2041,

2042, 2043, 2074,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112, 2120, 2131,

2132, 2197, 2205,

2244, 2245, 2246,

2253, 2254, 2255,

2292, 2321, 2324,

2327, 2328, 2329,

2331, 2383, 2388

Parasound 2151

peeKTON 2318

Philips 2026, 2061, 2062,

2075, 2090, 2094,

2096, 2097, 2103,

2110, 2126, 2180,

2193, 2205, 2231,

2235, 2241, 2251,

2252, 2256, 2260,

2268, 2282, 2332,

2333, 2343, 2344,

2345, 2367, 2371,

2373, 2380, 2382,

2385

Phonotrend 2317

Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,

2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067, 2113,

2134, 2207, 2230,

2236, 2265, 2266,

2267, 2297, 2322,

2351, 2352, 2353,

2354, 2355, 2356,

2357, 2358, 2359,

2377

Pointer 2312

Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185

Portland 2312

Powerpoint 2313

Prima 2174

Proceed 2208

Proscan 2206

Prosonic 2299, 2314

Protron 2152

Provision 2308

Pye 2194

Qwestar 2198

Raite 2302

RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,

2079, 2183, 2199,

2206, 2207, 2209

RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314

Regent 2203

Reoc 2305

Rimax 2315

Rio 2215

Roadstar 2281, 2308

Ronin 2313

Rotel 2153

Rowa 2200, 2301

Rownsonic 2307

Saba 2198, 2238

Sabaki 2305

Saivod 2312

Sampo 2223

Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,

2034, 2035, 2082,

2127, 2137, 2138,

2154, 2182, 2197,

2283, 2319, 2325,

2346, 2347, 2349,

2372, 2381

Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,

2305, 2312

Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,

2374

ScanMagic 2232

Schaub Lorenz

2312

Schneider 2226

Scientific Labs

2305

Scott 2243, 2311

Seeltech 2318

SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,

2313

Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,

2122, 2142, 2143,

2144, 2181, 2190,

2228, 2262, 2375

Shinsonic 2167

Sigmatek 2309, 2318

Silva 2310

Singer 2304, 2305

Skymaster 2279, 2305

vii

Skyworth 2310

Slim Art 2312

SM Electronic 2305

Sonic Blue 2215

Sontech 2316

Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,

2020, 2021, 2022,

2023, 2024, 2025,

2069, 2072, 2073,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2091, 2092, 2093,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130, 2249, 2250,

2323, 2334, 2335,

2336, 2360, 2361,

2362, 2363, 2364,

2365, 2384

Soundmaster 2305

Soundmax 2305

Spectra 2313

Spectroniq 2155

Standard 2305

Star Cluster 2305

Starmedia 2308, 2318

Sungale 2158

Sunkai 2312

Superscan 2196

Supervision 2305

Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189,

2196, 2219, 2224

Symphonic 2062, 2180

Synn 2305

T.D. E. Systems

2316

Tatung 2083, 2312

TCM 2228, 2379

Teac 2199, 2287, 2301,

2305

Tec 2310

Technics 2197

Technika 2312, 2317

Telefunken 2307

Tensai 2312

Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311

Theta Digital 2207

Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284,

2294

Tokai 2302, 2310

Top Suxess 2318

Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027,

2028, 2029, 2030,

2098, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119, 2136,

2187, 2195, 2205,

2291, 2337, 2338,

2378

TRANScontinents

2313, 2317

Transonic 2317

Trio 2312

Trutech 2160

TruVision 2309

TSM 2318

Umax 2315

United 2317

Urban Concepts

2205

US Logic 2167

Venturer 2199

Viewmaster 2318

Vocopro 2156

VocoStar 2157

Waitec 2318

Welltech 2300

Westinghouse 2109, 2168

Wharfedale 2304, 2305

Woxter 2315, 2318

Xbox 2206, 2229

Xlogic 2305, 2312

XMS 2312

Xoro 2300

Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315

Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002,

2003, 2011, 2018,

2019, 2036, 2106,

2197, 2273

Yamakawa 2302, 2313

Yukai 2232

Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205,

2211, 2215

Blu-ray Disc

LG 2115

Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132

Pioneer 2134

Samsung 2035, 2127

Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144

Sony 2025

Yamaha 2018

DVR

Bush 2060

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2040, 2041, 2042

Philips 2061, 2062

Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067

RCA 2059

Samsung 2035

Yamaha 2036

DVD Recorder

Aspire 2140

Astar 2162

Broksonic 2192

Go Video 2135

Hitachi 2108

Insignia 2080

Irradio 2103

JVC 2054, 2055, 2056,

2057

LG 2107, 2115, 2141,

2188

Liteon 2121

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2041, 2042, 2043,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112

Philips 2090, 2096, 2097,

2126, 2193

Pioneer 2067, 2113

Pye 2194

Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138

Sansui 2027

Sanyo 2139

Sony 2022, 2023, 2024,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130

Sylvania 2189

Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119

Yamaha 2106

Cable

ABC 3004, 3015, 3016,

3017, 3037, 3040,

3067, 3080, 3081

ADB 3070

Adelphia 3003

Alcatel 3066

Americast 3046

Amstrad 3048, 3068

Antronix 3019, 3020

Archer 3020

Arcon 3048

AT&T 3013

Axis 3048

Bell South 3046

Cable Vision 3014

Cabletenna 3019

Cabletime 3058

Cableview 3005

Clearmaster 3045

ClearMax 3045

Clyde Cablevision

3059

Colour Voice 3022

Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039

Comcrypt 3057

Comtronics 3023

Contec 3024

Coolmax 3045

COX 3006

Cryptovision 3060

Director 3006

Eastern 3025

Everquest 3041

Fidelity 3048

Filmnet 3057

Filmnet Cablecrypt

3061

Filmnet Comcrypt

3061

Finlux 3051

Focus 3044

Foxtel 3068

France Telecom

3054, 3055

Freebox 3069

GC Electronics

3020

GE 3015, 3016

GEC 3059

Gemini 3026, 3041

General Instrument

3006, 3008, 3016,

3039, 3050, 3067,

3075

Goldstar 3042

Gooding 3049

Grundig 3048, 3049

Hamlin 3027, 3028

Hirschmann 3051

Hitachi 3016

HomeChoice 3056

Humax 3001, 3002, 3071

ITT Nokia 3051

Jasco 3041

Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016,

3026, 3037, 3041,

3050, 3064, 3067,

3075

JVC 3049

Kabel Deutschland

3043, 3073, 3074

Macab 3055

Magnavox 3029

Maspro 3049

Matsui 3049

MegaCable 3039

Memorex 3030, 3040

Minerva 3049

Mnet 3057

Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010,

3013, 3039, 3072,

3075

Movie Time 3031, 3063

Mr Zapp 3055

Multichoice 3057

Multitech 3045

NEC 3018

NET Brazil 3007

Nokia 3051

Noos 3055

NSC 3031

Oak 3024

Pace 3011, 3043, 3084

Palladium 3049

Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040

Paragon 3040

Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,

3049, 3053, 3054,

3055

Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,

3042, 3048, 3083,

3084

Popular Mechanics

3044

Proscan 3015, 3016

Pulsar 3040

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

3064

Quasar 3040

RadioShack 3041, 3045

RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,

3077

Realistic 3020

Recoton 3044

Regal 3028

Regency 3025

Rembrandt 3016

Runco 3040

Sagem 3055

Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,

3042

SAT 3048

Scientific Atlanta

3003, 3004, 3011,

3012, 3013, 3062,

3078, 3079, 3080,

3081, 3082, 3083,

3084

Signal 3026, 3041

Signature 3016

Sony 3014, 3047

Sprucer 3036

Standard Component

3033

Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,

3067

Stargate 3026, 3041

Starquest 3026, 3041

Supercable 3008

Supermax 3045

Tele+1 3057, 3061

Telepiu 3057

Thomson 3000, 3009

TIME WARNER

3006

Tocom 3017

Torx 3067

Toshiba 3040

Tristar 3045

Tudi 3052

Tusa 3026, 3041

TV86 3031

Unika 3019, 3020

United Cable 3037, 3064

Universal 3019, 3020

Universum 3049, 3051

V2 3045

Videoway 3065

View Star 3024, 3029, 3031

viii

Viewmaster 3045

Vision 3045

Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055

Vortex View 3045

Wittenberg 3048

Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046

Zentek 3044

Sattelite

AB Sat 4138, 4139

AccessHD 4058

ADB 4142

AGS 4138

Akai 4101, 4103

Alba 4083, 4084, 4085,

4086, 4108, 4139

Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088

Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103

Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090

Alltech 4139

Alpha 4103

Alpha Digital 4058

Alphastar 4031

Amitronica 4139

Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136,

4139

Anglo 4139

Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090,

4139

Anttron 4083, 4086

Apollo 4083

Armstrong 4089, 4103

Artec 4054

Asat 4101, 4103

ASLF 4139

Astacom 4138

Astra 4089, 4091, 4100,

4137, 4139

Astro 4074, 4086, 4088,

4090, 4093, 4135,

4136, 4137

AudioTon 4086, 4098

Aurora 4140

Austar 4140

Axiel 4138

Axis 4074, 4090, 4091,

4096

Best 4074, 4090

Blaupunkt 4093

Blue Sky 4139

Boca 4089, 4100, 4105,

4139

Boston 4138

Brain Wave 4095

Broadcast 4094

Broco 4139

BSkyB 4113, 4123

BT 4138

Bubu Sat 4139

Bush 4084, 4127

Cambridge 4136

Canal Satellite 4135

Canal+ 4135

CaptiveWorks 4049

Channel Master

4060, 4085

Chaparral 4025

CHEROKEE 4138

Chess 4134, 4139

CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137

Clatronic 4095

CNT 4088

Comag 4000, 4001, 4002,

4003, 4004

Commlink 4087

Comtech 4096

Condor 4074, 4090, 4137

Connexions 4074, 4092

Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136,

4137

Conrad Electronic

4137, 4139

Contec 4096

Coolsat 4050

Cosat 4098

Coship 4063

Crown 4089

Daeryung 4092

Daewoo 4107, 4139

DDC 4085

Delega 4085

Dew 4096

Diamond 4097

Digiality 4137

Digital Stream 4059

DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020,

4021, 4022, 4024,

4037, 4038, 4040,

4041, 4043, 4045,

4057, 4106, 4143,

4144, 4145, 4146,

4147, 4148, 4149,

4150, 4151, 4152,

4153, 4154, 4155,

4156, 4157

Discoverer 4134

Discovery 4138

Diseqc 4138

Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,

4014, 4019, 4039,

4064

Dishpro 4039, 4064

Distrisat 4103

Ditristrad 4098

DNT 4092, 4101, 4103

Drake 4026

DStv 4140

Dune 4074

Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039,

4064, 4092, 4139

Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089,

4136, 4139

Elap 4138, 4139

Elekta 4088

Elsat 4139

Elta 4074, 4083, 4090,

4098, 4101, 4103

Emanon 4083

Emme Esse 4074, 4090

Engel 4139

Ep Sat 4084

EURIEULT 4077

Eurodec 4102

Europa 4103, 4136, 4137

Europhon 4137

Eurosat 4089

Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090,

4133, 4136, 4137

Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137

Eutelsat 4139

Exator 4083, 4086

Expressvu 4039

Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139

Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132

Fidelity 4136

Finlandia 4084

Finlux 4084

FinnSat 4096, 4102

Flair Mate 4139

Foxtel 4140

Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136

FTEmaximal 4074, 4139

Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090,

4092, 4093, 4101,

4133

Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090,

4091, 4096, 4098,

4133, 4140

GE 4015, 4016, 4061,

4151

General Instrument

4027, 4065

GMI 4089

GOI 4039

Goldbox 4135

GoldStar 4099

Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084

Goodmind 4061

Grandin 4077

Grothusen 4083, 4099

Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093,

4113, 4129, 4136,

4140

Hänsel & Gretel

4137

Hantor 4083, 4095

Hanuri 4088

Hauppauge 4126

Heliocom 4137

Helium 4137

Hinari 4085

Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128,

4136, 4137, 4138

Hisawa 4095

Hisense 4066

Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149,

4153

Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007

Houston 4098

HTS 4039

Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144,

4146, 4150, 4152

Hughes Network Systems

4021

Humax 4051, 4075, 4076,

4110

Huth 4087, 4089, 4094,

4095, 4096, 4098,

4137, 4141

Hypson 4077

Ilo 4066

Imex 4077

Innovation 4090

Insignia 4057

Intertronic 4089

Intervision 4098, 4137

ITT Nokia 4084

Jerrold 4065

Johansson 4095

JOK 4138

JSR 4098

JVC 4011, 4019, 4039,

4079

Kamm 4139

Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103,

4109, 4112, 4120,

4133, 4138, 4139

Kathrein Eurostar

4133

Klap 4138

Konig 4137

Kosmos 4099

KR 4086

Kreiselmeyer 4093

K-SAT 4139

Kyostar 4083

L&S Electronic

4074

Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,

4100, 4133, 4134,

4137

Lasonic 4062

Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,

4133, 4137, 4139

Leng 4095

Lennox 4098

Lenson 4136

Lexus 4103

LG 4053, 4057, 4099

Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,

4139

Lifetec 4090

Lorenzen 4137

Lorraine 4099

Lupus 4074, 4090

Luxor 4136

Lyonnaise 4102

Macab 4102

Magnavox 4045, 4055

Manata 4077, 4138, 4139

Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,

4138

Marantz 4101

Mascom 4088

Maspro 4084, 4139

Matsui 4138

Max 4137

Mediabox 4135

Mediamarkt 4089

Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136

Medion 4074, 4090, 4139

Medison 4139

Mega 4101, 4103

Memorex 4045

Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,

4086, 4087, 4088,

4139

Metz 4093

Micro electronic

4136, 4137, 4139

Micro Technology

4139

MicroGem 4056

Micromaxx 4074, 4090

Microstar 4090

Microtec 4139

Minerva 4093

Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152

Mitsumi 4100

Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,

4103, 4139

Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,

4065

Multichoice 4140

Multitec 4134

Muratto 4099

Mysat 4139

Navex 4095

Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,

4137, 4139

Neusat 4139

Next Level 4065

NextWave 4141

Nikko 4089, 4139

Nokia 4084, 4122

Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,

4088, 4102

Nova 4140

Novis 4095

Oceanic 4097

Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096

Okano 4089

Optex 4098

Optus 4135, 4140, 4141

Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135,

4136

OSat 4086

Otto Versand 4093

Pace 4084, 4093, 4113,

4121, 4125, 4138

Pacific 4097

Packsat 4138

Palcom 4085

Palladium 4089, 4136

Palsat 4134, 4136

Panasat 4140

Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046,

4084, 4113, 4118,

4143, 4148

Panda 4084, 4137

Pansat 4047

Patriot 4138

Paysat 4045

PCT 4060

Philco 4055

Philips 4021, 4022, 4045,

4084, 4101, 4103,

4111, 4115, 4135,

4138, 4150, 4152,

4153, 4155, 4156

Phoenix 4096

Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098

Pioneer 4124, 4135

Polsat 4102

Predki 4095

Premiere 4098, 4135

Priesner 4089

Primestar 4030

Profile 4138

Promax 4084

Prosat 4085, 4087

Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040,

4151

Protek 4097

Proton 4066

Provision 4088

Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087,

4090, 4138

Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137

Quiero 4102

RadioShack 4065

Radiola 4101, 4103

Radix 4092, 4119

Rainbow 4086

RCA 4015, 4016, 4034,

4035, 4036, 4037,

4038, 4040, 4151,

4157

Realistic 4028

Redpoint 4091

Redstar 4074, 4090

RFT 4087, 4101, 4103

Roadstar 4139

Roch 4077

Rover 4074, 4139

Saba 4088, 4133, 4137,

4138

Sabre 4084

Sagem 4069, 4102

Sakura 4096

Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023,

4041, 4042, 4081,

4082, 4083, 4114,

4150, 4154

SAT 4085, 4136

Sat Cruiser 4141

Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088,

4095, 4099, 4136

Sat Team 4139

Satcom 4094, 4137

Satec 4139

Satelco 4074

Satford 4094

Satmaster 4094

Satplus 4134

Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138

Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137

SCS 4133

Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092

SEG 4074, 4083, 4090,

4095

Seleco 4098

Servi Sat 4077, 4139

Siemens 4093

Silva 4099

Skantin 4139

Skardin 4091

Skinsat 4136

SKR 4139

Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087,

4134, 4139

Skymax 4101, 4103

SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137,

4139

Skyvision 4098

SM Electronic 4134, 4139

Smart 4133, 4139

Sony 4017, 4020, 4135

SR 4089, 4100

Star Choice 4065

Starland 4139

Starring 4095

Start Trak 4083

Strong 4074, 4083, 4086,

4090, 4099, 4140

STS 4033

STVI 4077

Sumida 4089

Sunny Sound 4074

Sunsat 4139

Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100

Supermax 4141

Tandberg 4102

Tandy 4086

Tantec 4084

TCM 4090

Techniland 4094

TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073,

4092, 4103, 4116,

4117, 4134, 4135,

4136

Technology 4140

Technosat 4141

Technowelt 4137

Teco 4089, 4100

Telanor 4085

Telasat 4133, 4137

Telecom 4139

Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138

Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092,

4136, 4137

Telemaster 4088

Telesat 4137

Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136

Televes 4084, 4136

Telewire 4098

Tempo 4141

Tevion 4090, 4139

Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102,

4104, 4130, 4133,

4135, 4137, 4138,

4139

Thorens 4097

Thorn 4084

Tivax 4058

Tivo 4150

Tokai 4103

Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,

4136, 4139

Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153

Triad 4099

Triasat 4136

Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,

4139

Turnsat 4139

Tvonics 4132

Twinner 4077, 4139

UEC 4140

Uher 4134

UltimateTV 4020

Uniden 4029, 4045

Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103

Unitor 4095

Universum 4093, 4133, 4137

US Digital 4066

Variosat 4093

Vega 4074

Ventana 4101, 4103

Viewsat 4048

Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,

4139

Voom 4065

Vortec 4083

Welltech 4134

WeTeKom 4134, 4136

Wevasat 4084

Wewa 4084

Winersat 4095

Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,

4136, 4137

Woorisat 4088

Worldsat 4138

Xrypton 4074

XSat 4139

Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,

4131, 4133

Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145

Zodiac 4086

Yamaha 5000, 5013

CD Recoder

Yamaha 5001

Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004

Tape

Yamaha 5005, 5006

Tuner

Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,

5010, 5014, 5015,

5016, 5017, 5018

USB

Yamaha 5012, 5021

DOCK

Yamaha 5011, 5022

Yamaha 2002

Printed in China WR90290

The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.

Les lettres dans les cercles et les numéros dans les carrés correspondent à ceux du mode d'emploi.

Le lettere cerchiate e i numeri nei quadratini corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni.

Las letras enmarcadas en un círculo y los números enmarcados en un cuadrado se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones.

Буквы в кружочках и цифры в квадратиках соответствуют таковым в инструкции по эксплуатации.

圆圈内的字母和正方形内的数字与说明书内的同类字母和数字相对应。

원 안의 문자들과 사각형 안의 숫자들은 사용자 설명서에 있는 것들과 일치합니다 .

■ Front panel/Face avant/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널

HTR-6250/6240

UCTKEF

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VIDEO

AUDIO

PORTABLE

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

STANDBY

/ON

DIRECT

T D G

J MC OK N

U PFE H

I RBLQS

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Telecomando/Mando a distancia/

Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 / 리모콘

WQ95610

Printed in China

POWER

1256

1234

POWER

V-AUX

[ A ] [ B ] DOCK

TUNER

MOVIE

DVD

TOP

MUSIC

SCENE

OPTIONSETUP

RETURN

ENTER

VOLUME

DISPLAY

MUTE

RADIO

STEREO

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

DIRECTSTRAIGHT

HDMI

AUDIO

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

SOURCE SLEEP

1234

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

REC

7856

1234

ENT

POWER

TV VOL

INPUT

MUTE

TV CH

Documenttranscriptie

U HTR-6250 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 10 11 12 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-i En Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. Caution-ii En 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model) .......................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model) 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by A STANDBY/ON. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents INTRODUCTION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Rear panel .................................................................. 5 Front panel display..................................................... 6 Remote control........................................................... 7 Quick start guide..................................................... 8 L Preparing remote control ....................................... 9 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9 Using the remote control............................................ 9 Connections ...........................................................10 Using Auto Setup..................................................... 18 When an error message is displayed during measurement........................................................ 20 When a warning message is displayed after measurement........................................................ 20 BASIC OPERATION Basic procedure........................................................ 21 Using the SCENE function ...................................... 21 Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE) .............. 22 Adjusting high/low frequency sound (tone control) 22 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 22 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 22 Using your headphones............................................ 22 Displaying input signal information ........................ 23 Changing information on the front panel display .... 23 Selecting a decoder used with a sound field program ............................................................................. 36 Setting sound field parameters................................. 36 Sound field parameters ............................................ 36 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ..................................................... 38 Basic operation of the setup menu........................... 39 Speaker Setup .......................................................... 39 Sound Setup ............................................................. 41 Function Setup ......................................................... 42 DSP Parameter......................................................... 43 Memory Guard......................................................... 43 Controlling other components with the remote control................................................................ 44 Setting remote control codes.................................... 44 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 44 Advanced setup..................................................... 45 APPENDIX Troubleshooting.................................................... 46 General..................................................................... 46 HDMI....................................................................... 49 Tuner (FM/AM)....................................................... 49 Remote control......................................................... 50 iPod™ ...................................................................... 50 Bluetooth™.............................................................. 51 Auto Setup (YPAO)................................................. 51 Glossary ................................................................. 53 Sound field program information ....................... 55 Information on HDMI™...................................... 55 Specifications......................................................... 56 Index ...................................................................... 57 APPENDIX Playback.................................................................21 OPTION menu items ............................................... 33 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ............................................................................ 36 ADVANCED OPERATION Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) ....................................................18 Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ............................................... 33 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14 Connecting other components ................................. 15 Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 16 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 16 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 17 Connecting the power cable..................................... 17 Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 17 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION PREPARATION Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component .................................. 32 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 32 INTRODUCTION Features.................................................................... 2 About this manual................................................... 3 Supplied accessories................................................ 3 Part names and functions....................................... 4 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 32 (at the end of this manual) List of remote control codes...................................i Enjoy the sound field programs ..........................24 Selecting sound field programs................................ 24 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) ................................................... 27 Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 27 Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 27 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 28 Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning).................................................................. 28 Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).................................................................. 28 English Using iPod™ ..........................................................30 Controlling iPod™................................................... 30 1 En INTRODUCTION Features ■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier • Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) • FRONT L/R: 90 W + 90 W • CENTER: 90 W • SURROUND L/R: 90 W + 90 W • SURROUND BACK L/R: 90 W + 90 W ■ Speaker/Preout outputs • Speaker jacks (7-channel), preout output jacks (subwoofer) ■ Input/Output terminals Input terminals • HDMI input x 4 • Audio/Visual input [Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input (optical) x 2, analog input x 2 [Video] Component video x 2, composite video x 4 • Audio input (analog) x 2 • Dock input x 1 • V-AUX input [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Composite video x 1 Output terminals • Monitor output [Audio/Video] HDMI x 1 [Video] Component video x 1, Composite video x 1 • Audio/Visual output [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Composite video x 1 • Audio output Analog x 1 ■ • • • • Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields CINEMA DSP Compressed Music Enhancer mode Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA ■ Digital audio decoders • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder • DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder • DTS NEO:6 decoder ■ Sophisticated FM/AM tuner • 40-station random and direct preset tuning • Automatic preset tuning 2 En ■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) • HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio. – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability • Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video → HDMI, component video → HDMI) capability for monitor out • Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video output 480i or 480p → 720p, 1080i or 1080p ■ DOCK terminal • DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) ■ Automatic speaker setup features • “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker outputs suitable for listening environments. ■ Other features • 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter • OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system • Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources • Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability • Sleep timer About this manual Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. PREPARATION Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. iPod™ x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ADVANCED OPERATION Supplied accessories BASIC OPERATION Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTSHD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. INTRODUCTION • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “ASTANDBY/ON” or “gHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that you received all of the following parts. • Remote control • Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) • Optimizer microphone • AM loop antenna • Indoor FM antenna APPENDIX English 3 En Part names and functions Front panel U T D E F G H P VOLUME HDMI THROUGH INFO l MEMORY PRESET h l AM FM TUNING h SCENE BD/DVD PHONES TONE CONTROL PROGRAM l STANDBY /ON A CD STRAIGHT DIRECT C INFO B C J K LM PRESET l / h F FM G AM INPUT l / h O OPTIMIZER MIC jack TUNING l / h SCENE Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (see page 21). J TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers (see page 22). K PROGRAM l / h L STRAIGHT Changes sound field programs (see page 24). Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (see page 27). 4 En S For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting output characteristics of speakers (see page 18). P VOLUME control Q VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack Controls the volume of this unit (see page 21). For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game console (see page 16). R AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game console (see page 16). S PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a portable music player (see page 16). Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (see page 28). I R PORTABLE Selects an input source (see page 21). Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (see page 28). H Q AUDIO Changes a sound field program to direct mode (see page 22). Selects an FM/AM preset station (see page 29). Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (see page 28). I N Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (see page 29). E O DIRECT Changes information display screens on the front panel display (see page 23). MEMORY N M For plugging headphones (see page 22). D VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h VIDEO Switches this unit between standby and on (see page 17). PHONES jack INPUT EFFECT STANDBY/ON B RADIO l h SILENT CINEMA A TV T Front panel display U HDMI THROUGH Displays information on this unit (see page 6). Lights up during pass-through output of an HDMI signal input to this unit while this unit is on standby (see page 42). Part names and functions Rear panel c b d k INTRODUCTION a SPEAKERS (BD/DVD) DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 ANTENNA HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER UNBAL. PR SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PR GND AM PREPARATION FM PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 a AV 6 AV OUT f AUDIO1 AUDIO2 g h SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT PRE OUT i j BASIC OPERATION e AV 5 DOCK terminal For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (see page 16). b HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 c ANTENNA jack d SPEAKERS terminal ADVANCED OPERATION For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (see page 15). For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 17). For connecting front right and left, center, surround and surround back speakers (see page 11). e AV 1-6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6 (see page 15). f AV OUT Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (see page 16). g AUDIO 1/2 For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2 (see page 16). h MONITOR OUT Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as a TV (see page 14). APPENDIX i AUDIO OUT Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (see page 16). j PRE OUT For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (see page 11). k Power Cable For connecting this cable to an AC wall outlet (see page 17). English 5 En Part names and functions Front panel display a b c d SLEEP STEREO TUNED f e VOL. MUTE SW C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR g a h HDMI indicator Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is selected as an input source. b CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP is selected. c Tuner indicator Lights up while receiving a radio broadcast signal from an FM/ AM station (see page 28). d SLEEP indicator e VOLUME indicator f MUTE indicator g Cursor indicators Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (see page 22). Displays volume levels. Flashes when audio is muted. Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. h Multi information display i Speaker indicators Displays menu items and settings for the current operation. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently output. Subwoofer Front L Surround L Surround back L SW C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR Center Front R Surround R Surround back R Surround back 6 En g i Part names and functions Remote control g b HDMI 1-4 AV 1-6 AUDIO 1/2 V-AUX CODE SET TRANSMIT c d POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP e HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Input selection keys f [A]/[B] AV 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK DOCK TUNER TUNER h h FM AM PRESET i MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC FM AM MEMORY PRESET k / n TUNING k / n ENHANCER SUR. DECODE j STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT i SCENE k l BD DVD TV CD SETUP Tuner keys Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. INFO Changes the information shown on the front panel display (see page 23). RADIO m OPTION Switches a band between FM and AM. j Sound selection keys k SCENE BASIC OPERATION INFO TUNING PREPARATION g AUDIO Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4. Selects AV inputs 1 through 6. Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2. Selects the V-AUX jack on the front panel of this unit. To control external components using the rExternal component operation keys separately from operations of this unit (see page 44). Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/ Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK jack. Selects the FM/AM tuner. INTRODUCTION a Selects sound field programs (see page 24). n TOP MENU MENU MUTE q p l SETUP m OPTION n Cursors k / n / l / h/ENTER/RETURN Displays the setup menu (see page 39). REC ADVANCED OPERATION Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (see page 21). DISPLAY RETURN r o VOLUME ENTER Displays the option menu (see page 33). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items displayed on the ENT ENTER RETURN TV INPUT t POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE o VOLUME +/– p DISPLAY front panel display or on a video monitor, or change settings. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen or ends the menu display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION s 1 Adjust the volume of this unit (see page 21). Remote control signal transmitter b TRANSMIT Transmits infrared signals. Changes the operation mode of the iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (see page 30). q Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (see page 22). Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. c CODE SET r SOURCE POWER s Numeric keys t TV control keys Enter numbers. Switches an external component on and off. e SLEEP f Operate a monitor such as a TV or projector. English Switches the sleep timer operations (see page 22). External component operation keys Operate recording, playback etc. of external components (see page 44). Sets remote control codes for external component operations (see page 44). d MUTE APPENDIX a POWER Switches this unit on and standby. 7 En Quick start guide When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on operations and settings. Step 1: Prepare items for setup Step 2: Set up your speakers Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items necessary for setup. For example, prepare the following items for setting up a 5.1-channel sound system. Front right speaker Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. • Placing speakers • Connecting speakers ☞P. 10 ☞P. 11 y Video monitor • This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions, and room acoustics, etc.). You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using the YPAO technology (see page 18). Subwoofer Front left speaker Step 3: Connect your components Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components. Center speaker Components (such as DVD player) Surround right speaker • Connecting a TV monitor or projector • Connecting other components • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver • Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 14 ☞P. 15 ☞P. 16 ☞P. 17 Surround left speaker Step 4: Turn on the power Requirements Speakers qty. Front speaker 2 Center speaker 1 Surround speaker 2 Active subwoofer 1 Speaker cable 5 Subwoofer cable 1 Reproduction component such as DVD player 1 Video monitor such as TV 1 Video cable or HDMI cable 2 Audio cable 2 y • Prepare two speakers (for front). The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1 Two surround speakers 2 One center speaker 3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s) • If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers. 8 En Connect the power cable and turn on this unit. • Connecting the power cable • Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 17 ☞P. 17 Step 5: Select the input source and start playback Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input source and start playback. • Basic procedure • Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 21 ☞P. 24 y • This unit supports the SCENE function that changes the input source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key. See page 21 for details. PREPARATION Preparing remote control 1 Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 3 Remote control sensor window PREPARATION 2 30 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places y • You can operate external components with this remote control by setting the remote control code. See page 44 for details. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX • Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control narrows – the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to leak. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be different even though they look the same. • If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set the remote control code. within 6 m (20 ft) ADVANCED OPERATION Take off the battery compartment cover. 30 BASIC OPERATION 1 3 INTRODUCTION Installing batteries in the remote control English 9 En Connections Placing speakers This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the optimum surround effect. 7.1-channel speaker layout Speaker channels C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more 6.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ ■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. ■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1channel speaker layout. ■ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB 5.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 10 En 80˚ SR Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the listening position at least 30 cm away from each other, ideally at the same distance as that between the front left and right speakers. In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are mixed down and output from the single surround back speaker. In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are output from the surround left and right speakers. ■ Subwoofer (SW) The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and lowfrequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections from a wall. Connections Connecting speakers When you connect speakers, connect them to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout. 7.1-channel Speakers b a g c f Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker L SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) g Surround back speaker R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (R) h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER INTRODUCTION ■ SPEAKERS HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND 6.1-channel SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT Speakers PRE OUT d h FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER ■ 5.1-channel Speakers Jacks on this unit FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) h Subwoofer SUB WOOFER APPENDIX a Front speaker L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION a Front speaker L ADVANCED OPERATION e Jacks on this unit BASIC OPERATION ■ PREPARATION DMI 3 English 11 En Connections Connecting the speaker cable Caution • A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker. • Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned on. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If images on the monitor are still distorted even when you use the magnetically shielded speakers, place the speakers away from the monitor. • Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in “ADVANCED SETUP” before connecting the speakers (see page 45). ■ Connecting to the FRONT terminals 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist bare wires of the cable together so that they will not cause a short circuits. ■ Connecting to the CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals 1 Press down the tab and insert the bare end of the speaker cable into the hole in the terminal. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare wires into the hole, and then tighten the knob. 2 Red: positive (+) 1 Black: negative (–) 3 Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. 2 Release the tab to secure the wire. Using bi-amplification connections You can connect speakers that support bi-amplification connections to this unit. Before connecting the speakers, set this unit to enable bi-amplification connections in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 45), and connect the speakers to this unit as shown below. Front speakers Right FRONT Left SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP This unit Banana plug Caution Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. 12 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs ■ ■ Audio jacks Jack and cables AUDIO jacks (white) L Description R (red) To transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. (orange) C O To transmit optical digital audio signals. Use optical fiber cables for optical digital audio signals. OPTICAL Video jacks Jack and cables VIDEO jacks VIDEO V HDMI Description • We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 23). • You can check error information on HDMI connections (see page 23). A video signal input to this unit is output from the output terminals in MONITOR OUT for the same kind of signal as the input signal. For example, if a VCR with a composite output signal and a DVD player with a COMPONENT VIDEO output signal are connected, connect both VIDEO jack and COMPONENT VIDEO jack in MONITOR OUT to the video monitor. If an HDMI input compatible monitor is connected, this unit automatically converts an analog signal that is input from a video input terminal to a digital video signal, and then output it from the HDMI OUT jack. To transmit conventional composite video signals. Use video pin cables. Input HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO jacks COMPONENT VIDEO PR To transmit component video signals that include luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and chrominance red (PR) components. Use component video cables. PR PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y VIDEO PB Y VIDEO Repeat Converted ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (yellow) PR Output HDMI ADVANCED OPERATION ■ HDMI To transmit digital video and digital audio signals. Use HDMI cables. BASIC OPERATION COAXIAL OPTICAL jacks HDMI jacks Description y AUDIO COAXIAL jacks Jack and cables PREPARATION To transmit conventional analog left and right audio signals. Use stereo pin cables. Connect red plugs to red jacks (R) and white plugs to white jacks (L). Video/audio jacks INTRODUCTION This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are connecting. (red) PB PB (blue) Y APPENDIX Y (green) English 13 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect a video monitor such as a TV or projector to an output terminal of this unit. You can select one of the following three types according to the input signal format supported by the video monitor. Note • When you connect this unit to the video monitor, make sure that this unit is on standby. Outputting sound of a TV from this unit TV, or projector c a To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection between the AV input 1-6 and an audio output terminal. If the TV supports an optical digital output, we recommend that you use the AV input 1. Connecting to the AV input 1 allows you to switch an input source to the AV input 1 with just a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 21). b Y HDMI PB PR V TV, or projector Digital output (optical) (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HD ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO UNBAL. PR FM GND AM UNBAL. PB PR P VIDEO Y FM PB MONITOR OUT GND AM Y ■ To connect an HDMI video monitor Jacks on components Jacks on this unit Y O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 a HDMI input ■ HDMI OUT To connect component video monitor Note • Only video signals input from this unit via the component input terminal are output from the component output terminal. Jacks on components b Component video output ■ Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) To connect composite video monitor Note • Only video signals input from this unit via the composite video input terminal are output from the composite video output terminal. Jacks on components c Video input (composite) 14 En Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) P VIDEO OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO1 Connections Connecting other components Note • When you connect this unit to the external components, make sure that this unit is on standby. Audio / video input (AV 1-6) Audio / video output (AV OUT) PREPARATION HDMI input (HDMI 1-4) (BD/DVD) DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 ANTENNA HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CE UNBAL. PR PR GND AM FM PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y INTRODUCTION This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control. Y MONITO OUT MONITOR BASIC OPERATION Audio output (AUDIO OUT) OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO1 AUDIO OUT AUDIO2 Audio input (AUDIO 1-2) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Audio and video player / Set-top box Output jacks on the connected external component External components External component with HDMI output Audio HDMI output Optical digital output Video Component video Audio Coaxial digital output Video Component video output Audio Coaxial digital output Video Composite output Audio Optical digital output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL VIDEO AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AUDIO AV 6 AUDIO APPENDIX External component with composite video output Audio/Video Output jacks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION External component with component video output Input sources/jacks of this unit Signals VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO • Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the Remote in/out terminal, you can switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 21). • You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 43). 15 En English y Connections ■ Audio player Output jacks on the connected external component Input sources/jacks of this unit External components Output jacks External component with optical digital output Optical digital output External component with coaxial digital output Coaxial digital output External component with analog audio output Analog audio output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 4 OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 5 AUDIO AV 6 AUDIO AUDIO 1 AUDIO AUDIO 2 AUDIO y • We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack. About audio/video output terminals Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jack and AUDIO OUT jack. An HDMI input signal, COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output. When using the AV OUT jack: connect an external component to the composite or analog audio terminal. When using the AUDIO OUT jack: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal. Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver This unit has the DOCK jack, to which you can connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK jack. Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/ receiver and this unit. Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. VOLUME l PRESET h l AM FM TUNING h SCENE BD/DVD OGRAM TV CD RADIO STRAIGHT DIRECT INPUT l h VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h EFFECT VIDEO DOCK AUDIO PORTABLE HDMI OUT ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO UNBAL. VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE PR FM PB GND VIDEO Y L R Analog audio output Analog audio output Video output V Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Game console/Camcorder Music player Note • When external components are connected both the PORTABLE jack and AUDIO jack, sound input from the PORTABLE jack is output. 16 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas After all connections are complete, plug the AC power cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet. To the AC wall outlet Indoor FM antenna AM loop antenna PREPARATION Outdoor AM antenna Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire, and extend it outdoors (use the AM loop antenna together with this antenna). Power cable (BD/DVD) DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 ANTENNA F COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO UNBAL. PR PR FM PB GND AM PB VIDEO VIDEO Y INTRODUCTION An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to the respective jacks. Connecting the power cable Y MONITOR OUT y Assembling the AM loop antenna 1 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel (or fPOWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit. 2 Press ASTANDBY/ON (or fPOWER) again to turn off this unit (standby mode). y Caution Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit to be saved incorrectly. Press and hold Insert APPENDIX Connecting the AM loop antenna The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other to the GND terminal. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back. • You can also turn on this unit by pressing ISCENE (or kSCENE). • This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall outlet. ADVANCED OPERATION • The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good reception. • Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit. • If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor antenna. For more details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. • Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is connected. Turning this unit on and off BASIC OPERATION Ground (GND terminal) The GND terminal is not for earth grounding. To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip, and place it in the moist ground. Release English 17 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit. 1 AutoSetup EQ Type;;;;Natural . Start []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start [ y “MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel display. The following menu screen appears on the video monitor. [ Caution • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not allow small children to enter the room during the procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. y • See page 39 for the “Manual Setup” procedure. • You can bring up the above menu screen from the setup menu (see page 39). Using Auto Setup 1 3 Check the following points. Before starting the automatic setup, check the following. • All speakers and subwoofer are connected properly. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The video monitor is connected properly. • This unit and the video monitor are turned on. • This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. • The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). • The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer are set to the maximum. Optimizer microphone y • It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME 4 MIN MIN MAX MAX Subwoofer 2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. UT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h VIDEO AUDIO Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. PORTABLE To select a sound character for adjustment, press nCursor k to select “EQ Type” and then press nCursor l / h. If this unit does not work when you press nCursor, press lSETUP once and then operate this unit. This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on automatically measured speaker characteristics. In “EQ Type,” you can select the following parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the desired sound characteristics. Natural This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound. Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat.” Optimizer microphone 18 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) 6 Front This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics as the front left and right speakers. Select this if your front left and right speakers have significantly better qualities than the other speakers. 5 1 AutoSetup Notes [SETUP]:Exit The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be subjected to high temperatures such on an AV component. y • If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel.” • Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of speakers. • If you press nENTER before removing the optimizer microphone, “1 Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the setup menu (see page 39) is displayed. 1 AutoSetup RESULT SP:3/4/0.1 DIST:8.0/8.5ft LVL:-3.5/+4.5dB . >Set Cancel ADVANCED OPERATION When measurement is successfully completed, “YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display and the results appear on the monitor. PRESS[ENTER] BASIC OPERATION Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise results, stay where you will not disturb the measurement, such as to the side of or behind the speakers or outside the room. AUTOSETUPComplete DisconnectMicrophone PREPARATION Press nCursor n to select “Start” and then press nENTER to start the setup procedure. A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10 seconds. A loud test tone is output during measurement. • During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • Press nCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure. Press nENTER to confirm the settings. The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to measurement results. To cancel the operation, press nCursor l / h to select “Cancel” and press nENTER. When the following screen appears, remove the optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now complete. INTRODUCTION Flat This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics. Select this if your speakers have similar qualities. []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Finish ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround Back/Subwoofer DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance APPENDIX LVL Displays the speaker output levels in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes English • If “ERROR” appears on the video monitor during “Auto Setup,” measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an error message is displayed during measurement” (page 20). • If problems occur during measurement, “WARNING (XX)” (xx indicates the number of warning) appears above “RESULT” (see page 20). 19 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) When an error message is displayed during measurement When a warning message is displayed after measurement Select “Retry” or “Exit” using nCursor l / h and then press nENTER. If a problem occurs during measurement, “WARNING” is displayed on the result display screen. Check the error and solve the problems. ERROR WARNING .E-9:USER CANCEL Don'toperate any function W-1:OUTOFPHASE Reversechannel FL--CENTER SL--SBL-- >RetryExit []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return Retry Performs “Auto Setup” again. Exit Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup.” y [ENTER]:Return y • See page 52 for details on warning messages. • Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto Setup” again. 1 Check if “→” is displayed on the left of “WARNING” and press nENTER. Details of the warning message are displayed. If there are multiple warning messages, you can display the next message using nCursor h. 2 To return to the top result display, press nENTER again. • See page 51 for details on error messages. • When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To continue measurement, select “Proceed.” However, we recommend that you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again. 20 En BASIC OPERATION Playback Using the SCENE function Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. 2 Press NINPUT l / h (or gInput selection keys) to select an input source. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. Input source name VOL. AV1 Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight TV AV 1 Straight CD AV 3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer Volume VOL. Volume-18.5dB L SL SW C R SR Note Select the desired input source/sound field program, and pressing down ISCENE (or kSCENE) until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. While display in the OPTION menu or SETUP menu, “SCENE Setting Complete” appears on the video monitor (OSD). Switching remotely controlled external components linked to scene selections You can operate an external component with the remote control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the external component for each input source. Setting remote control codes for desired input sources allows you to switch between external components linked to scene selections. 1 Register the remote control code of an external component to the desired input source (see page 44). Note • Remote control codes cannot be registered to TUNER input. English 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. Registering input source/sound field program APPENDIX When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is output, do the following. Press ISCENE (or kSCENE). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Turn the PVOLUME control to adjust the volume (or press oVOLUME +/–). Selecting a SCENE ADVANCED OPERATION Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. Refer to the operating instructions of the external component for details on playback. For selecting radio stations or playback of an iPod or Bluetooth component using this unit, see the following. • FM/AM radio tuning (see page 28) • Bluetooth component playback (see page 32) • iPod playback (see page 30) • When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing the SCENE key. BASIC OPERATION • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 43). 4 Input source y y 3 This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four scenes are available for different usages, such as playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Basic procedure 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS” (see page 33). 21 En Playback 2 Press gInput selection keys on the remote control for the input source whose remote control code was registered in step 1 for about 3 seconds while pressing down kSCENE key whose assignment you want to change. The external component can now be controlled remotely just by selecting a scene. Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE) 1 2 Press qMUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. The MUTE indicator on the front panel display flashes while audio output is muted. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press MDIRECT (or jDIRECT) to turn the Direct mode on or off. The following features are disabled in Direct mode. – sound field program, tone control – display and operation of the option menu and setup menu y • While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes dim. When setting it back off, the brightness of the screen returns to the previous setting. Using the sleep timer Press qMUTE again to resume audio output. The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. Adjusting high/low frequency sound (tone control) Press eSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press eSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range (Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off 1 Press JTONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. Treble 2 0.0dB Adjust the frequency range using KPROGRAM l / h. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB The display returns the previous screen soon after you release the key. Notes • The tone control settings are not effective during playback in direct mode. • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. 22 En Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front panel display lights up. Press eSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display. Using your headphones Plug your headphones in the BPHONES jack on the front panel. When you select a sound field program while using the headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT CINEMA mode. Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are divided to left and right channels. Playback Displaying input signal information y • Input signal information is displayed on both a video monitor and the front panel display. • Information on the input signal is also displayed on the front panel display. You can select the desired item using nCursor k / n. 1 Press nCursor k / n to select “Signal Info,” and press nENTER. Information on input signals is displayed. See page 34 on messages displayed on the screen. • If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at the bottom of the screen. • Information on the input signal is also displayed on the front panel display. You can select the desired item using nCursor k / n. 3 To end the information display, press mOPTION. Straight Sound field program (DSP program) HDMI1-4: AV1-6: AUDIO1-2: V-AUX: FM/AM: ADVANCED OPERATION Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Frequency, DSP Program, Audio Decoder iPod (Simple remote mode): Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder iPod (Menu browse mode): (in PlayInfo displayed) Artist, Album, Song, DSP Program, Audio Decoder (in Play menu displayed) List Bluetooth: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder BASIC OPERATION Notes Input source PREPARATION 2 Select the desired input source, and press mOPTION. The option menu for the selected input source is displayed (see page 33). Information displayed on the front panel display can be changed by pressing CINFO (or iINFO). The following information can be displayed according to the input source. For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP Program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display. INTRODUCTION When HDMI1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source, you can display audio/video signal information. Changing information on the front panel display ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 23 En Enjoy the sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders. Selecting sound field programs ■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel Press KPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select a desired sound field program. ■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs. Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press jMOVIE repeatedly. Sound field programs for music........................................................Press jMUSIC repeatedly. Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly. Multi-channel stereo reproduction ....................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly. Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press jSTEREO repeatedly. Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press jSUR.DECODE repeatedly. For example, if you select “Sci-Fi” in “movie/TV program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display. Sound field program category Sci-Fi Program name Notes • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources, this unit does not apply any sound field program other than the surround decoder and they are played back in straight decode mode. • If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. Sound field program descriptions This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. y • You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (see page 6). • Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 36. • in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP. For movie/TV program sources Program Descriptions Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater,” in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effectsfeaturing movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. 24 En Enjoy the sound field programs Program Descriptions This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. For audio music sources Program Descriptions This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. For stereo reproduction Program 2ch Stereo Descriptions APPENDIX Hall in Vienna ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. ADVANCED OPERATION Hall in Munich BASIC OPERATION Mono Movie PREPARATION This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. INTRODUCTION Drama Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. y • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. English 25 En Enjoy the sound field programs For Multi-channel stereo reproduction Program 7ch Stereo Descriptions Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. The Compressed Music Enhancer Program Descriptions Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Surround decode mode Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels. Decoder Descriptions Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources. PLIIx Movie / PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Music / PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Game / PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music. y • An input source is played back in straight decode mode (see page 27) when multi-channel audio signal is input. 26 En Enjoy the sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) To enable straight decoding mode, press LSTRAIGHT (or jSTRAIGHT). “Straight” appears on the front panel display. 2 To cancel straight decoding mode, press LSTRAIGHT (or jSTRAIGHT) again. A sound field program name appears on the front panel display, and sound is reproduced with that sound field effect. Note • SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions. – 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected. – direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. PREPARATION 1 SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically selected when you connect the headphone plug to the PHONES jack. INTRODUCTION In straight decoding mode, sounds are reproduced without sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced without a sound field effect. Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) BASIC OPERATION Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ADVANCED OPERATION Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. When “Sur. L/R SP” in the setup menu is set to “None” (see page 40), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the following conditions even if you set “Sur. L/R SP” to “None” (see page 40). – headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack. – 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected. – direct mode or straight decoding mode is used. APPENDIX English 27 En FM/AM tuning The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. ■ Frequency tuning mode (Auto tuning / Manual tuning) You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. y • You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the option menu (see page 34). 4 ■ Preset tuning mode (Preset tuning) You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. Note • “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the entered frequency is correct. Note • Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception. Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) 1 Press NINPUT l / h (or gTUNER) repeatedly and switch the input source to “TUNER.” 2 Press FFM (hFM) or GAM (hAM) to select a band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display according to the band that you have selected. 3 Press HTUNING l / h (or hTUNING k / n) to specify the frequency. To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n). The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. STEREO TUNED FM92.5MHz To tune in by direct frequency tuning, enter the frequency of the desired station using the numeric keys on the remote control. Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889” using sNumeric keys. Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset) using “Automatic station preset” or “Manual station preset.” Registering stations by automatic station preset The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use manual station preset. 1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press gTUNER) to switch the input source to “TUNER.” 2 Press mOPTION on the remote control. The option menu screen for setting options of tuner input appears on the front panel display. y • For details on the option menu, see page 33. • The option menu is displayed on monitor components. 3 Select “Auto Preset,” and press nENTER. The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press HTUNING l / h (or hTUNING k / n). When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. You can listen to better quality sound even when the tuner cannot receive a strong signal. 28 En Auto Preset Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later from the lowest frequency upwards. y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing hPRESET k / n or nCursor k / n while the front panel display is in the state as shown in the below figure. • To cancel registration, press nRETURN on the remote control. Status 01:FM87.5MHz Preset number Frequency FM/AM tuning Registering stations by manual station preset 1 2 Tune in to a station referring to “Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning)” (see page 28). Press EPRESET l / h (or hPRESET k / n) to select a preset number. y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped. • When “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed it means that no stations are registered. See page 28 and register stations. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing a sNumeric keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number. Clearing the preset station 1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press gTUNER) to switch the input source to “TUNER.” 2 Press mOPTION on the remote control. The option menu screen for setting options of tuner input appears on the front panel display. 3 Display “Clear Preset” using the nCursor k / n and press nENTER. The following screen appears on the display. y • By pressing down DMEMORY (or hMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip step 3 and register the preset number to be one higher than the last preset number. 3 01:FM92.5MHz Preset number of the registered station you want to clear. • You can cancel the operation and return to the option menu screen by pressing nRETURN on the remote control. 4 Flashing Preset number Empty (or frequency that is currently registered to the preset number) y • You can select a preset number using the sNumeric keys. APPENDIX 4 Select the preset number of the registered station you want to clear using the nCursor k / n and press nENTER. The preset station registered to the selected preset number is cleared. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press mOPTION. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION y New registered frequency 01:Empty ADVANCED OPERATION Press EPRESET l / h (or hPRESET k / n) on the remote control to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears on the display. When you select a registered preset number, a registered frequency is displayed on the right of the preset number. BASIC OPERATION Press DMEMORY (or hMEMORY). “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. PREPARATION You can manually register AM stations or FM stations with weak signals. Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) INTRODUCTION During the automatic station preset, the upper area of the screen changes as follows: READY → SEARCH → MEMORY each time a station is registered. When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears and the option menu screen automatically reappears. When you press mOPTION on the remote control, the screen returns to the original state. Press DMEMORY (or hMEMORY) again to register. When registration is complete, the screen returns to the original state. To end the operation, press mOPTION. y • To cancel registration, press nRETURN on the remote control or leave the tuner without any operations for about 30 seconds. English 29 En Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (see page 16), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control or the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 24). Notes • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using the YDS-11. y • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display. • For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section on page 50. Controlling iPod in menu browse mode Controlling iPod™ You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform the following operations with the remote control. Key ENTER n r p Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu w Search backward (Press and hold) f Search forward (Press and hold) a Skip forward b Skip backward s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) p Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) DISPLAY Switch between Menu browse mode and Simple remote mode Controlling iPod in simple remote mode You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying the menu on the video monitor. You can also directly control your iPod in this mode. 30 En You can perform advanced iPod operations using the remote control while looking at the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can browse the song files or video files stored on your iPod and displayed on the monitor, and change the settings of your iPod to suit your personal preferences. You cannot directly control your iPod in this mode. y • “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. 1 Change the input source to “iPod (DOCK)” using NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK). 2 Press pDISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen appears on the video monitor. iPodTop Music> Videos> 3 Press nCursor k / n to select “Music,” “Videos” or “Settings” and press nCursor h. • Select “Music” to browse music files. • Select “Videos” to browse video files. Note • “Videos” will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing video files. Using iPod™ 4 Shuffle/repeat playback You can use a special playback function such as shuffle playback and repeat playback by setting the option menu. Press pDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input source. The option menu can be displayed only in menu browse mode. Press pDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode before starting shuffle or repeat playback. Menu items of “Videos” Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your iPod. 2 Press mOPTION. The option menu is displayed. 3 Press nCursor k / n to select the desired playback function, Shuffle or Repeat, then press nENTER. The following playback styles are available depending on the playback function selected. Description of the play information display g b c d e f Shuffle: Plays back songs or albums in random order (Choices: Off, Songs, Albums). • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to play back albums in random order. i Repeat: Plays back songs or albums repeatedly (Choices: Off, One, All). • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each song. • Select “All” to repeat all songs. (search forward) and 4 y • You can change information screens on the front panel display using CINFO (or iINFO) (see page 23). Items displayed on the front panel display vary depending on mode that is currently selected. Select the desired style using nCursor l / h. The style is selected. Playback starts with the function selected in step 3. To return to the previous screen, press nRETURN. To return to the previous playback function, redo the above steps. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION a Track number/total tracks b Artist name c Album title d Song title e Progress bar f Elapsed time g Shuffle and repeat icons h (playback), (pausing), (search backward) i Remaining time h ADVANCED OPERATION iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia |||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 All a BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION Menu items of “Music” Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs INTRODUCTION ■ Press nCursor k / n / l / h to select a menu item and then nENTER to start playback. y APPENDIX • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the video monitor. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All,” “ 1 ” or “ All ” appears on the video monitor. English 31 En Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. Note • This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. 5 Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. If the Bluetooth have recognized the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA,” for instance, is displayed in the Bluetooth device list. 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth device list, and enter a path key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. ■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. y • The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component 1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK). 1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using NINPUT l / h (or gDOCK). 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. For details on operation of the Bluetooth component, refer to its operating instructions. 2 Press mOPTION. 3 Press nCursor n repeatedly to select “Connect” and press nENTER. After you execute “Connect,” communication with the Bluetooth component is established. When the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears on the front panel display. 3 Press mOPTION. The option menu for DOCK input appears on the video monitor. y DOCKOPTION • When you press nENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component, display the option menu again, select “Disconnect,” and press nENTER. .VolumeTrim Connect Pairing 4 [ [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select Press nCursor n to select “Pairing” and press nENTER. “Searching” appears on the front panel display and the pairing operation starts. y • To cancel pairing, press nRETURN. • You can also start pairing operation by pressing and holding DMEMORY on the front panel. 32 En 4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component. ADVANCED OPERATION Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) Select an input source using NINPUT l / h (gInput selection keys). 2 Press mOPTION on the remote control. The OPTION menu appears. The displayed OPTION menu items differ depending on the input source. For details, see the following section. OPTION menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input Source Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Auto Preset Clear Preset iPod (DOCK) Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Bluetooth (DOCK) Volume Trim Connect/ Disconnect Pairing 3 4 Select the desired menu item using nCursor k / n, and press nENTER. Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed. Change the setting of the selected menu item (or enable a function) using nCursor k / n / l / h and nENTER. Details of the selected menu item are displayed. Parameters you can set differ depending on the menu items. Details of the menu items are as follows: y Input source: All Adjustable range: -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB* to +6.0 dB (in 0.5 dB steps) • When nCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu, select the input source again using gInput selection keys. y • The default settings are marked with “*.” ■ Volume Trim Reduces any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. You can set this parameter for each input source. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To close the OPTION menu, press mOPTION. You can also use nRETURN to return to the previous screen or close the OPTION menu. ADVANCED OPERATION 5 [ [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select BASIC OPERATION HDMI1-4 HDMI1OPTION .VolumeTrim DecoderMode ExtendedSurround SignalInfo Menu item PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION This unit has an OPTION menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure for setting the OPTION menu items is described below. APPENDIX English 33 En Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ■ Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*/DTS Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Auto DTS ■ Automatically selects audio input signals. Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. Extended Surround Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*/PLIIxMovie/PLIIxMusic/EX/ES/ Off Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music EX/ES Off Automatically selects the most suitable decoder according to whether a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two speakers are connected. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two speakers are connected. Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 5.1-channel whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. ■ Signal Info Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Displays information on audio and video signals on the video monitor and front panel display. You can change information to be displayed on the front panel display using nCursor k / n. Signal Info parameters ■ Audio information Information Description Format Format of digital audio signals. Channel The number of input signal channels (front/ surround/LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/ 0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Sampling The sampling frequency per second in analog-to-digital conversion. Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second. Notes • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input. • The bit rate may vary during playback. ■ Video information Information Description In Format and resolution of video input signal. Out Format and resolution of video output signal. Message Error messages about HDMI signals and HDMI components. See the following for details of the error messages. HDMI error message (appears only when an error has occurred) HDCP authentication failed. HDCP Error Device Over The number of HDMI components connected is Out of Res. ■ over the limit. The connected monitor is not compatible with the video input signal. FM Mode Input source: TUNER Choices: Stereo*/Mono Sets FM broadcasting receiving mode. Stereo Receives in stereo mode. Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get better reception in MONO mode. 34 En Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ■ Auto Preset Input source: TUNER ■ INTRODUCTION Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency band and registers them as preset stations (see page 28). Clear Preset Input source: TUNER Clears the preset stations (see page 29). ■ Shuffle Input source: iPod (DOCK) Choices: Off*/Songs/Albums ■ PREPARATION Changes the shuffle playback style (see page 31). Repeat Input source: iPod (DOCK) Choices: Off*/One/All Changes the repeat playback style (see page 31). ■ Connect / Disconnect Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) ■ BASIC OPERATION Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off (see page 32). Pairing Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (see page 32). ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 35 En Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Selecting a decoder used with a sound field program 5 When using sound field programs for movies or TV programs (except for Mono Movie), you can select a surround decoder to be used with the sound field program after setting the parameters from the following decoders. To set the parameters for sound field programs, see the following section. Decoders that can be used with a sound field program • PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie) • Neo:6 Cinema Setting sound field parameters Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions of sources or rooms by setting the parameters (sound field elements). y • You can protect the sound field against the changes of parameters the sound filed parameters when “Memory Guard” of the setup menu is set to “On” (see page 43). To change the parameters, set it to “Off.” 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press lSETUP on the remote control. The setup menu appears on the monitor. 3 Press nCursor k / n to select “DSP Parameter” and press nENTER. The screen changes as follows. Sound field program MOVIE .Sci-Fi SUR.;;;;PLII Movie DSP Level;;;;;0dB Initialize p Cursor [ []/[]:Select Sound field parameters 4 Set values Press nCursor k / n to move “→” to the sound field program and press nCursor l / h to select the sound field program. 36 En Press nCursor k / n to select the parameter that you want to change, and press nCursor l / h to change the parameter. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter name displayed on the monitor when you change the parameter from its default setting. For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters” on this page. y • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to change other sound field program parameters. 6 To end the edit, press nRETURN. To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, nCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize” and then press, nCursor h. When the confirmation screen appears on the monitor, press nCursor h to confirm the initialization or nCursor l to cancel it. Sound field parameters y • The default settings are marked with “*.” CINEMA DSP parameters DSP Level Adjustable range: -6 dB to 0 dB* to +3 dB Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as follows. • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. →Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. →Reduce the effect level. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Parameters only usable in certain sound field programs 2ch Stereo only ■ Direct Choices: Auto*/Off Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. 7ch Stereo only CT Level/SL Level/SR Level/ SB Level Adjusts the volume of the center (CT), surround L (SL) surround R (SR) and surround back (SB) channels in the 7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. ■ Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only Choices: High*/Low Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. When the high-frequency signals of the source is emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low.” To reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low.” To increase the effect, set it to “High.” Choices: Off*/On Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Dimension Adjustable range: -3 to STD* to +3 Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Center Width Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7 You can spread the center sound toward left and right according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker. ■ When Neo:6 Music is selected C.Image Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. ADVANCED OPERATION Effect Level Panorama BASIC OPERATION Adjustable range: 0 to 100% When PLIIx Music/PLII Music is selected PREPARATION Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble” tone controls are both set to 0 dB. Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control circuit. ■ You can customize decoder effects by setting the following parameters. For kinds of decoders, see page 26. INTRODUCTION ■ Decoder parameters ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 37 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) You can call the setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus. You can change the following settings in the setup menu. For details, read “Basic operation of the setup menu” first, and see the respective pages. Menu/Submenu Speaker Setup Function Page Sets items for speakers. 39 1 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 39 2 Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 39 A)Config Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. 39 B)Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 41 C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between speakers and the listening position. 41 D)Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 41 E)Test Tone Generates test tones. 41 Sets various items for sound outputs. 41 1 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 41 2 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 41 Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals. 41 Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto. 42 Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output. 42 Sound Setup HDMI Auto Function Setup Set various items for HDMI and display. 42 Sets various items for input sources. 42 Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. 42 Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack. 42 Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input signals. 42 Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog video input signals. 42 Set items for a monitor or the front panel display. 42 Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 42 FL Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 42 OSD Shift Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor. 43 Sets items for volumes. 43 Adaptive DRC Adjust the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level. 43 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 43 Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 43 Changes input source names to be displayed on a video monitor or the front panel display. 43 1 HDMI 2 Display 3 Volume Init. Volume 4 Input Rename DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 43 Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 43 38 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) “A)Config” display (example) Basic operation of the setup menu A)Config The setup menu screen appears on both video display (OSD) and front panel display. Center SP INTRODUCTION Video display (OSD) SetupMenu . ;SpeakerSetup ;SoundSetup ;FunctionSetup ;DSPParameter ;MemoryGuard y • You can change other items by repeating step 4. 5 To finish the setting, press lSETUP. [ y • When nCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu, select the input source again using gInput selection keys. Front panel display Speaker Setup ;SpeakerSetup Press lSETUP on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. y 2 Select a menu using nCursor k / n, and press nENTER. Items of the selected menu are displayed. For example, the following screen appears when you select “Function Setup.” ;FunctionSetup . 1HDMI 2Display 3Volume 4InputRename [ y • You can return to the previous screen by pressing nRETURN. 3 To display submenus, select a menu that you want to set using nCursor k / n, and press nENTER. For example, the following screen appears when you select “2 Display.” . Dimmer;;;;;;;;;;;;0 FLScroll;;Continue OSDShift;;;;;;;;;0 Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic characteristics or the room, which are automatically measured. For details on operations, see page 18. 2 Manual Setup Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on manually set parameters. After Auto Setup (YPAO) is performed, you can check automatically adjusted parameters in the Manual Setup menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if necessary. ■ A)Config Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. y • The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size: Large or Small. Large and Small refer to speakers with woofer diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively. LFE/Bass Out Choices: [ 4 [ []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust [ [ Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound) channel or other channels. The output status is as follows. English Select an item using nCursor k / n, and change the setting of the item using nCursor l / h. Some items in the Manual Setup menu of Speaker Setup take up a full screen. To display other items in the Manual Setup menu, press nCursor k / n. SWFR/Front/Both* APPENDIX 2Display 1 Auto Setup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter • The default settings are marked with “*.” ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION In this section, procedures of setting menus using the video monitor are described. You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup (YPAO)” for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup” for manual adjustment. PREPARATION [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter None >Small Large 39 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Sur. L/R SP LFE channel signals Parameter Front speakers Subwoofer Other speakers Both Output Not output Not output SWFR Output Not output Not output Front Not output Output Not output Low-frequency components of other channel signals Parameter Front speakers Subwoofer Choices: None Small Other speakers Both [1] [2] [3] SWFR [4] [3] [3] Front Not output [1] [3] None/Small*/Large Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers. Large Select this when no surround speakers are connected. Surround channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. “Sur.B L/R SP” automatically switches to “None” when this is selected. Select this when small surround speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of surround channels are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when large surround speakers are connected. y [1] [2] [3] [4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small.” Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels. Outputs low frequency components when the sizes of speakers are set to “Large.” Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small.” • When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Sur.B L/R SP Choices: None Front SP Choices: Small/Large* Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers. Small Large Select this when small speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of the front left and right channels are output from a subwoofer. Select this when large speakers are connected. Note • When “LFE/Bass Out” is set to “Front,” you can only select “Large.” If “LFE/Bass Out” is changed to “Front,” “Front SP” automatically switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small.” Center SP Choices: None/Small*/Large Sets the size of center speaker. None Small Large Select this when no center speaker is connected. Center channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Low-frequency components of center channel are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when a large center speaker is connected. None/SMLx1/SMLx2*/LRGx1/LRGx2 Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers. SMLx1 SMLx2 LRGx1 LRGx2 Select this when no surround back speaker are connected. Surround back channel signals are output from the surround L/R speakers and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled, they are output from the surround L/R speakers and front speakers. Select this when one small surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two small surround back speakers are connected. Select this when one large surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two large surround back speakers are connected. y • When “None” is selected, “PLIIx Movie” or “PLIIx Music” cannot be selected. Crossover Freq. Choices: 40Hz/60Hz/80Hz*/90Hz/100Hz/110Hz/120Hz/ 160Hz/200Hz Sets the lower limit of the low frequency component output from a speaker with a size set to “Small (SMLx1/ SMLx2).” Sound with a frequency below that limit is output from a subwoofer or front speakers. If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. Subwoofer Phase Choices: Normal*/Reverse Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Normal Select this not to change the phase of your subwoofer. Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. 40 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ■ B)Level GEQ Adjustable range: -10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5 dB step) Defaults: “FR.L/FR.R/SWFR” 0dB* “CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR” -1.0dB 63Hz/160Hz/400Hz/1kHz/2.5kHz/ 6.3kHz/16kHz Adjustable range: -6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5 dB step) Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending on the number of speakers connected. Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust signal levels in 7 frequency ranges. To adjust the signal level in each range, select the desired speaker with nCursor l / h while “→” is displayed next to “Channel,” then select the desired frequency band with nCursor k / n, and adjust the signal level with nCursor l / h. ■ C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of each speaker. meters (m)/feet (ft)* meters (m) feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in meters. Displays the speaker distance in feet. Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft) Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) “Front L/Front R/ SWFR” 2.60m (8.5ft) “Center” 2.40m (8.0ft) “Sur. L/Sur. R/ Sur.B L/Sur.B R” y ■ D)Equalizer Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic equalizer. EQ Type Select Choices: Auto PEQ/GEQ*/Off Select an equalizer type. Not generate test tones. Generates test tones. Sound Setup You can set various items for sound outputs. ■ 1 Dynamic Range Choices: Min/Auto/STD/Max* Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for reproducing bitstream signals. Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. STD Sets the standard dynamic range recommended for regular home use. Max Outputs sound without adjusting the dynamic range of the input signals. ■ 2 Lipsync Adjusts delay between video output and audio output. HDMI Auto Choices: Off*/On Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video signals when a monitor that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to this unit. Off 41 En English On Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lip-sync function or you do not use the automatic lip-sync function. Set the correction time in “Manual Delay.” Select this when the connected monitor supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay.” APPENDIX Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in “Auto Setup.” Characteristics of the currently used parametric equalizer (see page 18) are displayed below “Auto PEQ.” GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press nENTER to adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Off Not use a graphic equalizer. Off On ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Different items are displayed depending on settings of “A)Config” (see page 39). • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “Sur.B” appears instead of “Sur.B L” and “Sur.B R.” Off*/On Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates test tones. To turn on the oscillator, select “On” using nCursor l / h. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the settings of “2 Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone. ADVANCED OPERATION Front L / Front R / Center / Sur. L / Sur. R / Sur.B L / Sur.B R / SWFR E)Test Tone Choices: BASIC OPERATION Unit Choices: ■ PREPARATION • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR.” • You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test Tone” to “On” (see page 41). • If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. INTRODUCTION y Choices: Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Auto Delay ■ Adjustable range: 0 to 240ms (1 ms step) Choices: Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.” The actual correction time is displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in “Offset” field. Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted from analog video input signals and output from the HDMI OUT jack. Manual Delay • Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog video signals cannot be upscaled. • When a video monitor is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set “MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (see page 45) and try it again. Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or you set “HDMI Auto” to “Off.” Function Setup You can set various items for HDMI and display. Resolution Through*/480p/720p/1080i/1080p Notes ■ Aspect Choices: Thrgh*/16:9/Smart You can set items for HDMI. Set a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog video input signals by a video conversion function. ■ Thrgh 1 HDMI Standby Through Choices: Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. When this parameter is set to “On” signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks can be output to a monitor component. On Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. Off y • To enables pass-through output, any one of the input sources connected to the HDMI1-4 must be selected before switching to standby. • When Standby Through turns on, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on the front panel display lights up. While the indicator lights up, this unit consumes up to 3W of power even on standby. ■ Audio Output Choices: Amp*/TV/Amp+TV Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack. Amp TV Amp+TV Outputs HDMI sound signals form the speakers connected to this unit. Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Sound output from the speakers connected to this unit is muted. Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers connected to this unit and the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Note • Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the monitor vary depending on specifications of the monitor. 42 En Outputs the video signals without changing the aspect ratio. Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 monitor with black bands on the right and left sides of the monitor screen. Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 monitor by stretching right and left of images to fit in the monitor screen. On/Off* 16:9 Smart Notes • You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set to “Thrgh.” • The setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3. • You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are input from the HDMI IN jack or 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input. 2 Display You can set items for a monitor or the front panel display. ■ Dimmer Adjustable range: -4 to 0* Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is darkened. Note • The brightness of display does not become bright in direct mode even if the value is increased. ■ FL Scroll Choices: Continue*/Once Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of characters exceed a display area of the front panel display. Continue Once Repeatedly displays all characters by scrolling. Displays all characters by scrolling once, halts scrolling, and then displays first 14 characters. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ■ OSD Shift 4 Input Rename Adjustable range: -5 to 0* to +5 3 Volume Selecting a name to be displayed from templates Select an input source that you want to change the name, and select a name from the following templates using Cursor. You can set items for volumes. ■ Adaptive DRC Choices: Auto/Off* VOLUME: low Auto Off Entering an original name Select an input source that you want to name, and press nENTER. You can enter up to 9 characters by selecting one character at a time with the following keys according to the following operation. Auto nCursor l / h Off Input level VOLUME: high Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y • The Adaptive DRC setting is effective for headphones. Max Volume Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB/+16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB.” The volume increases to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB (default). ■ Init. Volume The following characters are available for input. A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space DSP Parameter You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For details, see page 36. Memory Guard Choices: Off On Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set to a level that last time this unit is set to standby. Off*/On Protects settings of setup menu against accidental alteration. Not protect settings. Protects the settings of the setup menu (except for the Memory Guard setting). Note • When this parameter is switched to “On,” “G” appears while the setup menu is displayed on the video monitor. APPENDIX Choices: nENTER ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ nCursor k / n For selecting characters that you want to change For selecting characters to be entered For entering the selected characters ADVANCED OPERATION Input level Output level Output level Off – Satellite – VCR – Tape – MD – PC – iPod – HD DVD – “blank” BASIC OPERATION If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide – Blu-ray – DVD – SetTopBox – Game – TV – DVR – CD – CD-R PREPARATION Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. Auto Changes input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. You can select an input source that you want to change the name to be displayed using nCursor. INTRODUCTION Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor. To move up the screen, set this value larger. To move down the screen, set it smaller. Note • When you set “Max Volume” and “Init. Volume,” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB,” the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. English 43 En Controlling other components with the remote control You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for controlling external components are as follows: dSOURCE POWER Turns on and off an external component. Input source nCursor, ENTER, RETURN Operates the menus of external components. pDISPLAY Switches between the screens of external components. rExternal component operation keys Function as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. sNumeric keys Function as numeric keys of an external component. tTV control keys INPUT MUTE TV VOL +/– TV CH +/– POWER Switches visual inputs of TV Mute audio of TV Controls the volume of TV Switches channels of TV Turns on and off TV The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. ■ Default remote control code settings Input source Category Manufacturer Default code [HDMI1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018 [HDMI2] — — — [HDMI3] — — — [HDMI4] — — — [AV1] — — — [AV2] — — — [AV3] CD Yamaha 5013 [AV4] — — — [AV5] — — — [AV6] — — — [AUDIO1] — — — [AUDIO2] — — — [V-AUX] — — — [TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 44 En Manufacturer Default code [DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 [A]/[B] — — — “—” indicates no assignment y • An external component that is controlled by the remote control can be automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (see page 21). Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 1 Press cCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. 2 Press gInput selection keys. 3 Enter a remote control code using sNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered, bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails, bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. y • You can use tTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless of selected input sources. • You need to set the remote control code first to control external components. • The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. Category Resetting all remote control codes You can clear all the remote control codes previously set, and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press cCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as a tip of a ballpoint pen. bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. 2 Press lSETUP on the remote control. 3 Enter “9981” using sNumeric keys. Once the initialization is complete, bTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails, bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. Advanced setup Set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press ASTANDBY/ON while pressing and holding LSTRAIGHT on the front panel. The advanced setup menu appears on the front panel display. ADVANCEDSETUP 3 y • Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an actual display screen. SP IMP. -XXX Choices: 6 MIN/8 MIN* Selects output impedance of this unit according to connected speakers. 5 Press ASTANDBY/ON, turns off this system, and press ASTANDBY/ON again. The value set in step 3 becomes effective, and this unit turns on. When you select initialization in step 3, the initialization is performed. Setting a remote control ID Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted operation of the other amplifier. ID1 is set for both remote control and amplifier by default. When you change the remote control ID, display “Advance Setup” (see the previous section) and change the ID for the amplifier too. 2 Press lSETUP on the remote control. 3 Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using sNumeric keys. To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using sNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered, bTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, bTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. REMOTE ID -XXX Choices: ID1*/ID2 Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to the same setting. BI AMP - XXX Choices: ON/OFF* Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12. MON.CHK - XXXX Choices: YES*/SKIP Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. y • Initializing the remote control code (see page 44) returns it to ID1. APPENDIX INIT-XXXXXXXXX Choices: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press cCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. bTRANSMIT blinks twice. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION Press KPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the parameter you want to change. The default setting are marked with “*.” Press LSTRAIGHT a few times to select the value you want to change. The value selected here becomes effective when this unit is turned on the next time. You can change multiple settings by repeating steps 3 and 4. PREPARATION 1 4 INTRODUCTION In the advanced setup, you can set basic operations of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or initialize user settings. Perform the following steps to change settings. DSP PARAM/VIDEO/ALL/CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can select an initialization method from the following. English DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field programs VIDEO: Video conversion settings (resolution/ aspect) in the setup menu and the OSD display position ALL: Reset this unit to initial factory settings CANCEL: Cancellation of initialization 45 En APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 45 (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 11 This unit cannot be turned off. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — No sound. “Audio Output” in “1 HDMI” of Function Setup is set to “TV.” Select a choice for “Audio Output” (Function Setup→1 HDMI→Audio Output) other than “TV.” 42 A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the OPTION menu and set “Decoder Mode” to “Auto.” 33 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-16 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with NINPUT l / h or the gInput selection keys on the remote control. 21 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Display Signal info of the option menu and check the input signal format. If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback component is properly connected to this unit (or a proper input source is selected). If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format cannot be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 55 46 En Troubleshooting Problem No picture. Cause Remedy See page 14 This unit outputs the video signals are not supported on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the advanced setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 45 Displays the advanced setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES.” 45 Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the monitor to this unit via the COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output terminals. 14 The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 45 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11 The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “B)Level” settings. 41 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When a monaural source sound field program is applied, sound of all channels are output from the center speaker for some surround decoders. Try another sound field program. 24 No sound is output from a specific speaker. Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change the input source to another one. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and enables output of that speaker. 6, 21, 24, 40 The volume of that speaker is set to minimum in Speaker Setup in the Setup menu. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (Manual Setup→B)Level). 41 This unit or speaker is malfunction. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction. 6, 10 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press LSTRAIGHT or the jSTRAIGHT on the remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode. 27 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 24 The sound suddenly goes off. No sound is heard from the surround speakers. APPENDIX If your monitor does not support the HDMI connection, connect it to the COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output terminals and select an appropriate video input on the monitor. ADVANCED OPERATION The composite output terminals are used to output a component video signal, or the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are used to output a composite video signal. BASIC OPERATION — PREPARATION Select an appropriate video input on the monitor. INTRODUCTION An appropriate video input is not selected on the monitor. English 47 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause Remedy See page “LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in “Speaker Setup” of the setup menu (Speaker Setup→Manual Setup→A)Config) is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signal is being played. Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both.” 39 “LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in “Speaker Setup” of the setup menu (Speaker Setup→Manual Setup→A)Config) is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “Both.” 39 The source does not contain low frequency signals. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. “Extended Surround” in the OPTION menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto.” Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” 40 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its operating instructions. — Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.” “Memory Guard!” is displayed and the setting cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to “On.” Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 43 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — 48 En 16, 34 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. Cause Remedy — HDMI Problem No picture or sound. See page The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 15 Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. See page Check the antenna connections. 17 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — Switch to monaural mode. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station or an input from the antenna is weak. Replace an outdoor antenna with more sensitive multi element antenna. — Tune in manually or by direct frequency tuning. 28 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 28 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 17 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 17 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — There are buzzing and whining noises. APPENDIX AM You are too far from the station transmitter or the input from the antenna is weak. Remedy ADVANCED OPERATION FM Cause BASIC OPERATION Tuner (FM/AM) PREPARATION The video software is copy-protected. INTRODUCTION The picture is disturbed. See page English 49 En Troubleshooting Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 45 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 44 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 44 If this unit does not work when you press nCursor, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the gInput selection keys on the remote control again. When the key does not work during OPTION menu/ SETUP menu operation: press the key applicable for the current menu operation again. — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. iPod™ Note • In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and the OSD, check the connection of your iPod (see page 16). Problem Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 50 En Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 16 Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 16 This unit supports iPod Touch, iPod (Click Wheel), iPod nano and iPod mini. — Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Place your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 16 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — Bluetooth™ Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of the pairing. The pairing is completed. Canceled The pairing is canceled. BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. BT Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. ADVANCED OPERATION Completed BASIC OPERATION The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of establishing the connection. PREPARATION Problem INTRODUCTION Disconnected Auto Setup (YPAO) Notes If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screen appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again. Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. APPENDIX • • • • Before Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 18 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 43 During Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11 E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround channels are detected. Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11 51 En English E-1:NO FRONT SP Troubleshooting Error message Cause Remedy See page E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. If you connect only one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-side (SINGLE) terminal. 11 E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed accurately due to loud ambient noise. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. When using surround back speakers, you need to connect surround L/R speakers. 11 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto Setup.” 18 E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 18 Check whether the speakers are properly placed and connected. 11 The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha dealer or service center. 18 E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was cancelled due to an inappropriate user operation. Run “Auto Setup” again. 18 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 18 After Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker. If they are correct, the speakers work properly even when this message is displayed. 11 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all speakers are placed in a similar environment. — Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 11 We recommended that you use speakers with the same or similar specifications. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. — 52 En Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. ■ ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Component video signal ■ Composite video signal ■ Deep Color ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ APPENDIX Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ADVANCED OPERATION With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ BASIC OPERATION With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. PREPARATION A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. INTRODUCTION Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Dolby TrueHD 53 En English Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. Glossary ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1channel format. ■ DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Bluray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. 54 En ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.” ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Sound field program information ■ ■ CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. ■ BASIC OPERATION Information on HDMI™ HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. ADVANCED OPERATION 2ch Linear PCM PREPARATION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. INTRODUCTION Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) connections. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. APPENDIX y Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz English 55 En Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 90 W [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω .......................................................... 90 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 95/110/130/150 W [Other models] Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .......................................... 100/110/125 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea, General and Asia models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................... 115 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 105 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω.......................................................................................0.23 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models] Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ................................. 90 W • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance AV5, etc................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...................................2.0 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small) ................................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT ..................................10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ............................................................................. 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers.......................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) ............................ 60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control ................................... MUTE / –80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control (Front Speakers) BASS Boost/Cut....................................................±10 dB at 50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................±10 dB at 20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small) ......................................................................................12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ..........................................................24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models].......................NTSC [Other models]..........................................................................PAL • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ........................... NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video [U.K., Europe and Russia models] ....................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio...................................................50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ................................................................ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................... 74 dB/69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ..................................................................... 0.3/0.3% • Antenna Input (unbalanced) .......................................................75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ...................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]...................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General models] ...............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model]...................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model]................................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Russia models] ...................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia models]................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................270 W/320 VA [Other models]...................................................................... 280 W • Standby Power Consumption Standby through off ....................................................0.2 W or less Standby through on........................................................3 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ................................................... 490 W • Dimensions (W x H x D)...................................435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in) • Weight...................................................................... 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 56 En Index ■ Numerics A B ■ C E E)Test Tone, speaker setup ............................ 41 Editing sound field program .......................... 36 Editing surround decoder ............................... 36 Effect Level, sound field parameter ............... 37 ENTER, remote control ................................... 7 EQ Type Select, D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................................. 41 Extended Surround, OPTION menu .............. 34 External component operation key, remote control ............................................. 7 ■ F FL Scroll, 2 Display, function setup .............. 42 FM antenna connection .................................. 17 FM Mode, OPTION menu ............................. 34 FM tuning ...................................................... 28 FM, front panel ................................................ 4 Frequency tuning ........................................... 28 Front L, C)Distance, speaker setup ................ 41 Front left speaker ........................................... 10 Front panel ....................................................... 4 Front panel display .......................................... 6 Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4 Front R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41 Front right speaker ......................................... 10 Front SP, A)Config, speaker setup ................ 40 Function setup, setup menu ........................... 42 ■ H Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 25 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 25 HDMI Auto, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ............. 41 HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6 HDMI information ......................................... 55 HDMI jack ..................................................... 13 HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4, rear panel ................. 5 HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4 HDMI, troubleshooting .................................. 49 Headphones using .......................................... 22 Hi-fi sound playback ...................................... 22 High frequency sound adjustment ................. 22 ■ I INFO, front panel ............................................. 4 M Manual Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ......... 42 Max Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ....... 43 Memory guard, setup menu ........................... 43 MEMORY, front panel ................................... 4 MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 45 MONITOR OUT, rear panel ........................... 5 Mono Movie, sound field program ............... 25 Multi information display, front panel display ...................................... 6 Music Video, sound field program ................ 25 MUTE indicator, front panel display .............. 6 MUTE, remote control .................................... 7 ■ N Numeric key, remote control ........................... 7 ■ O OPTICAL jack .............................................. 13 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel ................ 4 OPTION menu .............................................. 33 OPTION, remote control ................................. 7 OSD Shift, 2 Display, function setup ............ 43 ■ P Pairing Bluetooth components ...................... 32 Pairing, OPTION menu ................................. 35 Panorama, decoder parameter ....................... 37 PHONES jack, front panel .............................. 4 Placing speaker .............................................. 10 PORTABLE jack, front panel ......................... 4 Power cable connection ................................. 17 Power Cable, rear panel .................................. 5 POWER, remote control ................................. 7 PRE OUT, rear panel ...................................... 5 PRESET l / h, front panel ........................... 4 Preset tuning .................................................. 28 PROGRAM l / h, front panel ...................... 4 Projector connection ...................................... 14 ■ R Registering input source ................................ 21 Registering sound field program ................... 21 Remote control ................................................ 7 Remote control code resetting ....................... 44 Remote control code setting .......................... 44 Remote control ID, advanced setup .............. 45 Remote control signal transmitter, remote control ............................................. 7 Remote control, controlling other component ................................................ 44 Remote control, preparation ............................ 9 Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 50 REMOTE ID, advanced setup ....................... 45 Repeat playback, iPod ................................... 31 Repeat, OPTION menu ................................. 35 Resetting remote control code ....................... 44 Resolution, 1 HDMI, function setup ............. 42 RETURN, remote control ............................... 7 57 En English C)Distance, speaker setup ..............................41 C.Image, decoder parameter ..........................37 Cellar Club, sound field program ...................25 Center SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...............40 Center speaker ................................................10 Center width, decoder parameter ...................37 Center, C)Distance, speaker setup .................41 Chamber, sound field program .......................25 CINEMA DSP indicator, front panel display .......................................6 CINEMA DSP parameter ...............................36 Clear Preset, OPTION menu ..........................35 COAXIAL jack ..............................................13 CODE SET, remote control .............................7 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ..........................13 Connect, OPTION menu ................................35 Connecting AM antenna ................................17 Connecting audio and video player ................15 Connecting audio player ................................16 Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ......................................................16 Connecting FM antenna .................................17 ■ ■ APPENDIX B)Level, speaker setup ...................................41 Basic operation, setup menu ..........................39 BI-AMP connection switch, advanced setup ..........................................45 BI-AMP, advanced setup ...............................45 Bluetooth component playback ......................32 Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection .................................................16 Bluetooth, troubleshooting .............................51 D D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................ 41 Decoder Mode, OPTION menu ..................... 34 Decoder parameter ......................................... 37 Dimension, decoder parameter ...................... 37 Dimmer, 2 Display, function setup ................ 42 DIRECT, front panel ....................................... 4 Direct, sound field parameter ........................ 37 Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................... 35 DISPLAY, remote control ............................... 7 Displaying input signal information .............. 23 DOCK terminal, rear panel .............................. 5 Drama, sound field program .......................... 25 DSP Level, sound field parameter ................. 36 DSP Parameter, setup menu .......................... 43 L ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ LFE/Bass Out, A)Config, speaker setup ....... 39 Low frequency sound adjustment ................. 22 BASIC OPERATION A)Config, speaker setup .................................39 Action Game, sound field program ................25 Adaptive DRC, 3 Volume, function setup .....43 Adjusting high frequency sound ....................22 Adjusting low frequency sound .....................22 Advanced setup ..............................................45 Adventure, sound field program ....................24 AM antenna connection .................................17 AM tuning ......................................................28 AM, front panel ................................................4 ANTENNA jack, rear panel .............................5 Aspect, 1 HDMI, function setup ....................42 AUDIO 1/2, rear panel .....................................5 Audio and video player connection ................15 AUDIO jack ...................................................13 Audio jack ......................................................13 AUDIO L/R jack, front panel ...........................4 AUDIO OUT, rear panel ..................................5 Audio Output, 1 HDMI, function setup .........42 Audio player connection ................................16 Auto Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ..............42 Auto Preset, OPTION menu ..........................35 Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ............51 Automatic setup .............................................18 AV 1-6, rear panel ............................................5 AV OUT, rear panel .........................................5 ■ PREPARATION ■ INFO, remote control ...................................... 7 INIT, advanced setup .................................... 45 Init. Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ........ 43 Initialize setting, advanced setup .................. 45 INPUT l / h, front panel .............................. 4 Input selection key, remote control ................. 7 Input signal information displaying .............. 23 Input source registration ................................ 21 Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9 iPod playback ................................................ 30 iPod universal dock connection ..................... 16 iPod, troubleshooting .................................... 50 Connecting iPod universal dock .................... 16 Connecting power cable ................................ 17 Connecting projector ..................................... 14 Connecting set-top box .................................. 15 Connecting speaker ........................................ 11 Connecting speaker cable .............................. 12 Connecting TV monitor ................................. 14 Connection ..................................................... 10 Controlling other component, remote control ........................................... 44 Crossover Freq., A)Config, speaker setup ..... 40 CT Level, sound field parameter ................... 37 Cursor indicator, front panel display ............... 6 Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control ........... 7 INTRODUCTION 1 Dynamic Range, sound setup ......................41 1 HDMI, function setup .................................42 2 Display, function setup ................................42 2 Lipsync, sound setup ...................................41 2ch Stereo, sound field program ....................25 3 Volume, function setup ...............................43 4 Input Rename, function setup .....................43 5.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 6.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 7.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 7ch Enhancer, sound field program ...............26 7ch Stereo, sound field program ....................26 Index Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 25 ■ S SB Level, sound field parameter ................... 37 SCENE function ............................................ 21 SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4 SCENE, remote control ................................... 7 Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 24 Selecting SCENE ........................................... 21 Setting remote control code ........................... 44 Set-top box connection .................................. 15 Setup menu .................................................... 38 Setup menu basic operation ........................... 39 SETUP, remote control ................................... 7 Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 31 Shuffle, OPTION menu ................................. 35 Signal Info parameter .................................... 34 Signal Info, OPTION menu ........................... 34 SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 27 SL Level, sound field parameter .................... 37 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6 Sleep timer ..................................................... 22 SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7 Sound field parameter .................................... 36 Sound field program editing .......................... 36 Sound field program registration ................... 21 Sound selection key, remote control ................ 7 Sound setup, setup menu ............................... 41 SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7 SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 45 Speaker cable connection .............................. 12 Speaker connection ........................................ 11 Speaker impedance, advanced setup ............. 45 Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6 Speaker layout ............................................... 10 Speaker placement ......................................... 10 Speaker setup ................................................. 39 SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5 Specifications ................................................ 56 Spectacle, sound field program ..................... 24 Sports, sound field program .......................... 25 SR Level, sound field parameter ................... 37 Standard, sound field program ....................... 24 Standby Through, 1 HDMI, function setup ............................................ 42 STANDBY/ON, front panel ............................ 4 Straight decoding mode ................................. 27 Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 26 STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4 Subwoofer ...................................................... 10 Subwoofer Phase, A)Config, speaker setup ............................................. 40 Sur. L, C)Distance, speaker setup .................. 41 Sur. L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ........... 40 Sur. R, C)Distance, speaker setup ................. 41 Sur.B L, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41 Sur.B L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ........ 40 Sur.B R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 41 Surround back left speaker ............................ 10 Surround back right speaker .......................... 10 Surround back speaker ................................... 10 Surround decoder editing ............................... 36 Surround left speaker ..................................... 10 Surround right speaker ................................... 10 SWFR, C)Distance, speaker setup ................. 41 ■ Turning off .....................................................17 Turning on ......................................................17 TV control key, remote control ........................7 TV monitor connection ..................................14 ■ U Using the remote control ..................................9 ■ V VIDEO jack ....................................................13 Video jack ......................................................13 VIDEO jack, front panel ..................................4 Video/audio jack ............................................13 Virtual CINEMA DSP ...................................27 VOLUME +/-, remote control .........................7 VOLUME control, front panel .........................4 VOLUME indicator, front panel display .........6 Volume Trim, OPTION menu .......................33 ■ Y YPAO .............................................................18 YPAO, troubleshooting ..................................51 T The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 25 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ........ 25 Tone control ................................................... 22 TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4 TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7 Troubleshooting ............................................. 46 Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6 Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7 Tuner, troubleshooting .................................. 49 TUNING l / h, front panel .......................... 4 Tuning, AM ................................................... 28 Tuning, FM .................................................... 28 58 En “ASTANDBY/ON” or “fPOWER” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to “Part names and functions” on page 4. List of remote control codes TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0274 0260 0261, 0273 0259 0100, 0224, 0257, 0258, 0259, 0264, 0265 Advent 0204 Adventura 0107 Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328 Agashi 0327, 0328 Agazi 0259 Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Aim 0274 Aiwa 0028, 0297 Akai 0063, 0096, 0101, 0205, 0231, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Akiba 0262, 0274 Akura 0259, 0262, 0273, 0274 Alaron 0327 Alba 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0266, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0294, 0300, 0327 Albatron 0222 Alcyon 0249 Alleron 0105 Allorgan 0328 Allstar 0268, 0274 America Action 0225 AMOi 0326 Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275, 0328 Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273, 0274 Amtron 0104 Anam 0225, 0261 Anam National 0102, 0104 Anglo 0261, 0273 Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261, 0263, 0273, 0274 AOC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Apex 0061, 0117, 0139 Arcam 0327, 0328 Arcam Delta 0260 Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274 Arthur Martin 0275 ASA 0257, 0265 Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274 Astra 0261 Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Atori 0261, 0273 Auchan 0275 Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328 Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225 Ausind Autovox Aventura Awa Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line Bastide Baur Bazin Beko Belcor Bell & Howell Benq Beon Best Bestar Binatone Blue Sky Blue Star Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brillian Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Candle Capsonic Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Centurion Century CGE Changhong Chimei Cimline Citizen City Clarion Clarivox 0249 0249, 0257, 0259, 0260, 0328 0097 0327, 0328 0206 0328 0230, 0257 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0328 0271, 0274 0328 0243, 0269, 0274, 0282, 0351, 0357, 0372, 0380 0090 0065, 0100 0051, 0160, 0315 0268, 0271, 0274 0243 0243, 0268, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0274 0270 0260, 0328 0270, 0274 0104, 0225 0267, 0272 0228 0274 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0090 0063, 0225 0257 0262 0261, 0262, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0286, 0294, 0300, 0328, 0329, 0351, 0388, 0394, 0413 0072, 0090, 0096, 0107 0259 0274 0096 0266 0088 0261, 0273, 0274 0317 0268, 0271, 0274 0229, 0328 0057, 0101 0117 0268, 0271, 0274 0257 0243, 0249 0117 0323 0261, 0273 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0104 0261, 0273 0225 0271 Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0328 CMS 0327 CMS Hightec 0328 Coby 0151 Colortyme 0072, 0090 Commercial Solutions 0071 Concerto 0072, 0090 Concorde 0261, 0273 Condor 0243, 0260, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0327 Contec 0225, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0273, 0327 Contec/Cony 0094, 0104 Continental Edison 0267 Cosmel 0261, 0273 Craig 0104, 0225 Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249, 0257 Crown 0104, 0225, 0243, 0249, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274 CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327 CTC Clatronic 0263 CTX 0159 Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0099, 0224 CXC 0104, 0225 Cybertron 0262 Cytron 0202 Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103, 0119, 0245, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0281, 0285, 0303, 0321, 0327, 0328, 0344, 0361, 0387 Dainichi 0262, 0327 Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Dantax 0243, 0271 Dawa 0274 Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090, 0261, 0273 De Graaf 0264 Decca 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Dell 0167, 0195 Denver 0308, 0312 Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274 Diamant 0274 Diamond 0327 DiamondVision 0213, 0221 Dimensia 0099 Disney 0137 Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Dream Vision 0415, 0416 DTS 0261, 0273 Dual 0260, 0274, 0328 Dual-Tec 0260, 0261 Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0328 Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133, 0225 Dux 0271 Dwin 0224 Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274 Dynex 0181, 0182 Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274, 0328 Elcit 0257 Electa 0270 ELECTRO TECH 0261 Electroband 0057, 0101 Electrograph 0226 Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101, 0102 Element 0180 Elin 0260, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327 Elite 0262, 0268, 0274 Elman 0263 Elta 0261, 0273, 0327 Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077, 0082, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0095, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0119, 0225, 0243, 0257, 0274 Emprex 0200 Envision 0072, 0090, 0096 Epson 0156, 0201, 0309 Erres 0268, 0271, 0274 ESA 0097 ESC 0328 Etron 0261 Eurofeel 0328 Euro-Feel 0259 Euroline 0271 Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328 Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268, 0274 Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268, 0274, 0327, 0328 Expert 0275 Exquisit 0274 Fenner 0261, 0273 Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272 Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274, 0327 Filsai 0328 Finlandia 0264 Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268 Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257, 0260, 0266, 0269, 0328 Flint 0268, 0274 Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258, 0260, 0271, 0327 Formenti/Phoenix 0327 Fortress 0257, 0258 Fraba 0243, 0274 Friac 0243 Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264, 0265, 0273, 0328 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0105, 0328 Fujitsu General 0328 i Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427, 0428, 0429 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0225, 0259 Futuretech 0104, 0225 Galaxi 0269, 0274 Galaxis 0243, 0274 Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227 GBC 0261, 0266, 0273 GE 0069, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0106, 0112, 0131 Geant Casino 0275 GEC 0260, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273 General Technic 0261, 0273 Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268, 0274 GFM 0177, 0210 Giant 0328 Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096, 0108 GoldHand 0327 Goldline 0274 GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0322, 0328, 0395, 0399, 0412 Gorenje 0243, 0269 GPM 0262 GPX 0211 Gradiente 0162 Graetz 0265 Granada 0249, 0260, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270, 0271 Gronic 0328 Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249, 0274, 0356 Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225 Haier 0187, 0207 Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327, 0328 Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090 Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328 Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274 Hantor 0274 Harman/Kardon 0088 Harvard 0104, 0225 Harwood 0273, 0274 Havermy 0224 HCM 0259, 0260, 0261, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hema 0273, 0328 Hewlett Packard 0146 Higashi 0327 HiLine 0274 ii Hinari Hisawa Hisense Hitachi Hornyphon Hoshai Huanyu Hygashi Hyper Hypson Hyundai Iberia ICE ICeS Ilo IMA Imperial Indiana Infinity InFocus Ingelen Ingersol Initial Inno Hit Innovation Insignia Inteq Interactive Interbuy Interfunk International Intervision Irradio Isukai ITC ITS ITT ITV Janeil JBL JC Penney JCB Jensen JVC 0261, 0262, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0270, 0275 0165 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0072, 0090, 0094, 0173, 0254, 0255, 0256, 0260, 0264, 0265, 0266, 0274, 0285, 0300, 0319, 0328, 0348, 0349, 0385, 0402, 0410 0268, 0274 0262 0260, 0327 0260, 0327, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0327, 0328 0259, 0260, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 0223 0274 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0327 0198, 0203 0104 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0274 0268, 0271, 0274 0088 0168, 0277, 0313, 0397, 0430 0265 0261, 0273 0203 0249, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0182, 0188, 0190, 0209 0076 0243 0261, 0273 0243, 0257, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274 0327 0243, 0259, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0328 0249, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0268, 0270, 0274, 0327 0261, 0265 0261, 0271, 0274 0107 0088 0072, 0073, 0085, 0090, 0099, 0103, 0106 0057, 0101 0072, 0090 0017, 0018, 0019, 0092, 0093, 0094, 0106, 0251, 0252, 0266, 0268, 0293, 0360, 0379 Kaisui Kamosonic Kamp Kapsch Karcher Kawasho KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC Kingsley KLH Kloss Novabeam Kneissel Kolster Konka Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda KTV Kyoto Lasat Lenco Lenoir Leyco LG LG/GoldStar Liesenk Liesenkotter Life Lifetec Lloyds Loewe Loewe Opta Logik Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman Luxor LXI M Electronic MAG Magnadyne Magnafon 0260, 0261, 0262, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0260 0260, 0327 0265 0243, 0260, 0261, 0271, 0274 0072, 0090, 0101, 0327 0225 0243, 0263, 0264, 0274 0072, 0090, 0096 0328 0260, 0327 0117 0104, 0107 0243, 0250, 0274 0268, 0274 0262 0268, 0271, 0274 0243, 0257 0274 0261 0085, 0096, 0104, 0225, 0229, 0260, 0328 0327, 0328 0243 0261, 0273 0260, 0261, 0273 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274 0016, 0038, 0039, 0077, 0103, 0145, 0222, 0243, 0246, 0253, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0290, 0299, 0316, 0327, 0328, 0351, 0359, 0367, 0382, 0384, 0389, 0396 0246 0271 0274 0259, 0261 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 0273 0243, 0250, 0274, 0280, 0306, 0347 0257, 0268, 0271 0100 0264, 0271, 0273, 0274 0264, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268 0072, 0090 0260, 0264, 0328 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0099 0260, 0261, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271 0050 0257, 0263, 0271 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0098, 0114, 0115, 0129, 0134, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210 Magnum 0259, 0261 Majestic 0100 Mandor 0259 Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0158, 0268, 0271, 0274 Marelli 0257 Mark 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Masuda 0328 Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328, 0405 Matsushita 0067 Maxent 0193, 0226 Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274 Medion 0259, 0261, 0274 Megapower 0222 Megatron 0072, 0077 MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Melvox 0275 Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077, 0100, 0103, 0133, 0219, 0261, 0273 Memphis 0261, 0273 Mercury 0273, 0274 Metz 0257 MGA 0072, 0077, 0090, 0096, 0103 Micromaxx 0259, 0261 Microstar 0259, 0261 Midland 0069, 0071, 0073, 0076, 0085, 0106, 0108 Minerva 0249 Minoka 0268, 0274 Mintek 0203 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103, 0196, 0224, 0257, 0266, 0268, 0274, 0298, 0371 Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250, 0260, 0327, 0328 Monivision 0222 Montgomery Ward 0100 Motion 0249 Motorola 0102, 0224 MTC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0327 Multi System 0271 Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0264, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Murphy 0260, 0327 NAD 0061, 0072, 0077 Naonis 0264 NEC 0026, 0053, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0266, 0328 Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips 0243, 0257, 0260, 0264, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268, 0271, 0274 0226 0273, 0274 0261, 0268 0262 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0259, 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0072, 0077, 0096 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 0265 0155 0328 0257, 0265, 0267, 0268 0271 0274 0265, 0275 0243, 0269, 0274 0052, 0140, 0149, 0154, 0157 0260 0104, 0225 0274 0208 0065, 0067 0194 0224 0268, 0274 0121, 0192, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0329 0274 0259, 0260, 0262, 0274, 0328 0262 0258, 0260, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0243, 0260, 0269, 0274, 0328 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0006, 0007, 0066, 0067, 0068, 0069, 0070, 0102, 0106, 0113, 0147, 0215, 0241, 0265, 0274, 0279, 0310, 0332, 0334, 0368, 0374 0274 0243, 0250, 0260, 0275, 0327 0261, 0273 0061, 0069, 0071, 0077, 0096 0274, 0327 0274 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0243, 0249, 0257, 0274 0260, 0328 0040, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0098, 0099, 0102, 0114, 0135, 0143, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210, 0212, 0232, 0233, 0257, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0278, 0287, 0301, 0302, 0307, 0311, 0314, 0330, 0331, 0333, 0337, 0338, 0339, 0341, 0343, 0345, 0355, 0363, 0365, 0377, 0378, 0381, 0383, 0406, 0409, 0414 Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115 Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072, 0090, 0243, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0408 Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273, 0274 Playsonic 0328 Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184, 0220 Poppy 0261, 0273 Portland 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103 Prandoni-Prince 0249, 0264 Precision 0260, 0328 Prima 0161, 0207, 0261, 0265, 0273 Princeton 0222 Prism 0069, 0106 Profex 0261, 0273 Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274 Proline 0268, 0274 Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099 Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Protech 0259, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0328 Proton 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094 Protron 0150 PROVIEW 0050, 0164 Provision 0271, 0274 Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108 Pye 0268, 0271, 0274, 0296, 0338 Pymi 0261, 0273 Quandra Vision 0275 Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102, 0106 Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Questa 0266 Radialva 0274 RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077, 0096, 0225, 0274 RadioShack/Realistic 0072, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0099, 0104 Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Radiomarelli 0257, 0274 Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273, 0274 Rank 0266 RCA Realistic Recor Redstar Reflex Revox Rex RFT Rhapsody R-Line Roadstar Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sambers Sampo Samsung Sandra Sansui Sanyo SBR Sceptre Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scotch Scott Sears SEG SEI 0071, 0072, 0073, 0074, 0075, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0103, 0109, 0120, 0179, 0218 0065, 0077, 0096, 0225 0274 0274 0274 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0264, 0265 0243, 0250, 0257 0327 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273 0257 0327, 0328 0243 0257 0076, 0096, 0108 0257, 0265, 0267, 0272, 0376 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0264, 0265 0249, 0263 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0226 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0072, 0077, 0084, 0085, 0086, 0087, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0118, 0217, 0229, 0235, 0236, 0237, 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0284, 0295, 0327, 0328, 0336, 0346, 0390, 0407 0260, 0327, 0328 0063, 0121, 0268, 0274 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0065, 0090, 0141, 0191, 0243, 0250, 0260, 0266, 0273, 0291, 0327, 0328, 0370, 0373, 0391 0271, 0274 0166, 0185 0265 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0287, 0300, 0328, 0364, 0366 0072, 0077 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094, 0104, 0105, 0199, 0225 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0097, 0099, 0105 0259, 0260, 0263, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0300, 0327, 0328 0274 SEI-Sinudyne Seleco Sencora Sentra Serino Sharp Sheng Chia Shogun Siarem Sierra Siesta Signature Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound & Vision Soundesign Soundwave Squareview SSS Standard Starlite Stenway Stern Strato Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwood Superla Superscan SuperTech Supra Supre-Macy Supreme Susumu Sutron SVA Sydney 0257, 0263, 0265 0264, 0265, 0266 0261, 0273 0273 0327 0009, 0010, 0011, 0072, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0110, 0148, 0183, 0216, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0258, 0266, 0288, 0304, 0324, 0325, 0340, 0358, 0362, 0369, 0386, 0392, 0398, 0400, 0401, 0403 0224 0090 0257, 0263, 0274 0268, 0274 0243 0100 0327 0266 0257, 0263, 0275 0257, 0263, 0271, 0274 0265 0265 0243, 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0265, 0275 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0041, 0057, 0058, 0059, 0060, 0101, 0116, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0142, 0169, 0170, 0171, 0172, 0174, 0234, 0261, 0266, 0276, 0289, 0292, 0393, 0411 0262, 0263 0072, 0077, 0090, 0104, 0105, 0225 0268, 0271, 0274 0097 0090, 0104, 0225 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0104, 0225, 0271, 0273, 0274 0270 0264, 0265 0273, 0274 0328 0261 0273, 0274 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0095, 0224 0273, 0274, 0327 0261, 0273 0107 0057, 0101 0262 0261, 0273 0197 0260, 0327, 0328 iii Sylvania Symphonic Syntax Syntax-Brillian Sysline Sytong Tandy Tashiko Tatung TCM Teac Tec Technics TechniSat Techwood TEDELEX Teknika Teleavia Telecor Telefunken Telegazi Telemeister Telesonic Telestar Teletech Teleton Televideon Televiso Tensai Tesmet Tevion Texet Thomson Thorn TMK TNCi Tokai Tokyo Tomashi Toshiba Totevision Towada Trakton Trans Continens Transtec Trident iv 0072, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0097, 0098, 0175, 0177, 0210 0097, 0104, 0108, 0133, 0210, 0225 0149 0149 0271 0327 0224, 0258, 0260, 0262, 0265, 0328 0260, 0264, 0266, 0327, 0328 0102, 0227, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0274, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0067, 0069, 0106 0320, 0417, 0418, 0419 0069, 0072, 0090, 0106 0328 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0094, 0100, 0103, 0104, 0105, 0225 0267 0274, 0328 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274 0274 0274 0274 0274 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 0260, 0328 0327 0275 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0268 0259, 0261 0260, 0273, 0327, 0328 0238, 0239, 0240, 0260, 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274, 0335 0271, 0274 0072, 0077, 0090 0076 0268, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0270 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0061, 0062, 0063, 0064, 0065, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0128, 0130, 0132, 0139, 0214, 0244, 0266, 0283, 0305, 0328, 0329, 0342, 0350, 0352, 0353, 0354, 0375, 0404 0085 0265, 0328 0328 0274, 0328 0327 0328 Triumph Uher 0274 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0274 Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0327 Unic Line 0274 United 0271 Universum 0243, 0249, 0259, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Univox 0274 Vector Research 0096 Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 Victor 0093, 0266, 0268 VIDEOLOGIC 0327 Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 VideoSystem 0268, 0274 Videotechnic 0327, 0328 Vidikron 0088 Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103 Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226, 0318 Viking 0107 Viore 0198 Visiola 0260, 0327 Vision 0268, 0274, 0328 Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160, 0227, 0420, 0421, 0422, 0423, 0424 Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274 Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264, 0265, 0268, 0274 Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328 Wards 0072, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0096, 0098, 0099, 0100, 0103, 0105 Watson 0268, 0271, 0274 Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327 Waycon 0061 Wega 0257, 0266, 0274 Wegavox 0273 Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142 White Westinghouse 0008, 0119, 0260, 0263, 0271, 0274, 0327 Wincom 0055, 0056 Xrypton 0274 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Yamishi 0274, 0328 Yokan 0274 Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Yorx 0262 Zanussi 0264, 0328 Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078, 0079, 0090, 0100, 0108, 0111 VCR ABS 1066 Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1023 1090 1023, 1072, 1073, 1074 Akai 1071, 1073 Akiba 1079, 1090 Akura 1073, 1079, 1090 Alba 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Alienware 1066 Ambassador 1076 American High 1022 Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091 Anitech 1079, 1090 Apex 1010 ASA 1077, 1078 Asha 1020 Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090 Audio Dynamics 1018 Audiosonic 1091 Audiovox 1021 Baird 1072, 1073, 1075, 1091 Bang & Olufsen 1067 Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Baur 1078 Beaumark 1020 Bell & Howell 1019 Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091 Black Panther Line 1075, 1091 Blaupunkt 1078 Bondstec 1076, 1090 Broksonic 1054 Bush 1074, 1075, 1079, 1090, 1091, 1097, 1099, 1109, 1139 Calix 1021 Candle 1020, 1021 Canon 1022 Cathay 1091 Catron 1076 CGE 1072, 1073 Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090 CineVision 1058 Citizen 1020, 1021 Clatronic 1076, 1090 Colortyme 1018 Condor 1075, 1076, 1091 Craig 1020, 1021 Crown 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022 Cybernex 1020 CyberPower 1066 Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076, 1091, 1116, 1141 Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091 Dantax 1074 Daytron 1075, 1091 DBX 1018 De Graaf 1078 Decca 1072, 1073, 1078 Dell 1066 Denko 1090 DiamondVision 1050 DigiFusion 1092 DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1065 Dish Network 1064 Dishpro 1064 Dual 1073, 1078, 1091 Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Echostar Elbe Elcatech Electrohome Electrophonic Elsay Elta Emerson 1072, 1078 1032 1023 1064 1091 1090 1021 1021 1090 1079, 1090, 1091 1021, 1022, 1023, 1070, 1090 ESC 1075, 1091 Etzuko 1079, 1090 Expressvu 1064 Ferguson 1073 Fidelity 1072, 1090 Finlandia 1078 Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078 Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079, 1090 Fisher 1019 Flint 1074 Formenti/Phoenix 1078 Frontech 1076 Fuji 1022 Fujitsu 1072 Funai 1023, 1072 Galaxy 1072 Garrard 1023 Gateway 1066 GBC 1076, 1079 GE 1020, 1022 GEC 1078 Geloso 1079 General 1076 General Technic 1074 GOI 1064 GoldHand 1079, 1090 Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072, 1077 Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Gradiente 1023 Graetz 1073 Granada 1078 Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Grundig 1078, 1079 Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091 Harley Davidson 1023 Harman/Kardon 1018 Harwood 1090 HCM 1079, 1090 Headquarter 1019 Hewlett Packard 1066 Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 Hisawa 1074 Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078, 1089, 1108, 1124 HNS 1060 Howard Computers 1066 HP 1066 HTS 1064 Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061 Hughes Network Systems 1038, 1060 Humax 1035, 1060, 1094 Hush 1066 Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 iBUYPOWER Impego Imperial Inno Hit 1066 1076 1072 1075, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Innovation 1074 Instant Replay 1022 Interbuy 1077, 1090 Interfunk 1078 Intervision 1072, 1091 Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090 ITT 1073 ITV 1075, 1077, 1091 JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022 JCL 1022 JVC 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1028, 1035, 1064, 1073, 1085, 1117, 1130, 1131, 1133, 1134, 1135, 1136 Kaisui 1079, 1090 Karcher 1078 Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076, 1090 Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073 Kodak 1021, 1022 Korpel 1079, 1090 Kyoto 1090 Lenco 1075 Leyco 1079, 1090 LG 1021, 1053, 1072, 1077, 1088, 1100, 1106, 1125, 1143 Lifetec 1074 Linksys 1066 Lloyd’s 1023 Loewe Opta 1077, 1078 Logik 1079, 1090 Lumatron 1075, 1091 Luxor 1090 LXI 1021 M Electronic 1072 Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044, 1070 Magnin 1021 Manesth 1079, 1090 Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022, 1078 Mark 1091 Marta 1021 Matsui 1074, 1077 Matsushita 1022 Media Center PC 1066 Mediator 1078 Medion 1074 MEI 1022 Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1032, 1048, 1069, 1072, 1077 Memphis 1079, 1090 MGN Technology 1020 Micromaxx 1074 Microsoft 1066 Microstar 1074 Migros 1072 Mind 1066 Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078 Motorola 1022 MTC 1020 Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090 Murphy 1072 NEC 1018, 1019, 1073 Neckermann 1073, 1078 NEI 1078 Nesco 1079, 1090 Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091 Nikko 1021 Niveus Media 1066 Noblex 1020 Nokia 1073, 1091 Nordmende 1073 Northgate 1066 Oceanic 1072, 1073 Okano 1074, 1090, 1091 Olympus 1022 Optimus 1021 Orion 1033, 1069, 1074, 1097, 1139 Orson 1072 Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Otto Versand 1078 Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079, 1090 Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009, 1022, 1026, 1042, 1043, 1068, 1082, 1101, 1126, 1132 Pathe Marconi 1073 Perdio 1072 Philco 1022, 1090 Philips 1022, 1030, 1035, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1044, 1055, 1060, 1078, 1084, 1095, 1096, 1104, 1105, 1111, 1113, 1122, 1124, 1127, 1128, 1129 Philips Magnavox 1030 Phonola 1078 Pilot 1021 Pioneer 1078, 1118 Polaroid 1010, 1049 Portland 1075, 1076, 1091 Prinz 1072 Profex 1079 Proline 1072 Proscan 1065 Prosonic 1074, 1091 Pulsar 1032 Pye 1052, 1078 Quarter 1019 Quartz 1019 Quasar 1022 Quelle 1072, 1078 Radialva 1090 RadioShack 1021 RadioShack/Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Radiola 1078 Radix 1021 Randex 1021 RCA 1020, 1022, 1025, 1035, 1040, 1047, 1060, 1065 Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 ReplayTV 1041, 1068 Rex 1073 RFT 1076, 1078, 1090 Ricavision Roadstar 1066 1075, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Royal 1090 Runco 1032 Saba 1073 Saisho 1074, 1079 Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038, 1040, 1046, 1060, 1080, 1107, 1110, 1112, 1121, 1123, 1140, 1142 Samurai 1076, 1090 Sanky 1032 Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069, 1073 Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114 Saville 1091 SBR 1078 Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073 Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Sears 1019, 1021, 1022 SEG 1079, 1090, 1091 SEI-Sinudyne 1078 Seleco 1073 Sentra 1076, 1090 Sentron 1079, 1090 Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057, 1081, 1115, 1137 Shintom 1079, 1090 Shivaki 1077 Shogun 1020 Siemens 1077 Silva 1077 Silver 1091 Singer 1022 Sinudyne 1078 Solavox 1076 Sonic Blue 1041, 1068 Sonneclair 1090 Sonoko 1075, 1091 Sontec 1077 Sony 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1024, 1027, 1036, 1062, 1066, 1083, 1098, 1103, 1138 Stack 1066 Stack 9 1066 Standard 1075, 1091 Stern 1091 STS 1022 Sunkai 1074 Sunstar 1072 Suntronic 1072 Sunwood 1079, 1090 Superscan 1070 Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044, 1052, 1070 Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090 Systemax 1066 Tagar Systems 1066 Taisho 1074 Tandberg 1091 Tandy 1019 Tashiko 1021, 1072 Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078 TCM 1074, 1093, 1120 Teac 1023, 1091 Tec 1076, 1090, 1091 Technics 1022 Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023 Teleavia 1073 Telefunken Teletech Tenosal Tensai 1073 1090, 1091 1079, 1090 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Tevion 1074 Thomson 1073, 1087 Thorn 1073 Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037, 1039, 1040, 1060, 1061, 1062 TMK 1020 Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090 Tonsai 1079 Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034, 1051, 1063, 1066, 1073, 1078, 1086, 1099, 1102, 1119, 1144 Totevision 1020, 1021 Touch 1066 Towada 1079, 1090 Towika 1079, 1090 TVA 1076 Uher 1077 UltimateTV 1065 Ultravox 1091 Unitech 1020 United Quick Star 1075, 1091 Universum 1072, 1077, 1078 Vector Research 1018 Video Concepts 1018 Videon 1074 Videosonic 1020 Viewsonic 1066 Voodoo 1066 Wards 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Weltblick 1077 XR-1000 1022, 1023 Yamaha 1018, 1019 Yamishi 1079, 1090 Yokan 1079, 1090 Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090 Zenith 1032 ZT Group 1066 DVD 4Kus Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2097 2220 2169, 2201 2312 2318 2272 2170, 2195, 2225, 2227 Akura 2310 Alba 2018, 2232, 2247, 2259, 2264 Alco 2199 Alize 2315 Allegro 2215 Amitech 2312 Amphion MediaWorks 2145 AMW 2145, 2313 Apex 2044, 2045, 2046, 2047, 2076, 2208, 2209 Apple 2163 Arrgo 2216 Asono 2318 Aspire 2140, 2202 Astar 2162 v ATACOM Audiovox Avious Awa Axion Bang & Olufsen Baze BBK Bellagio Best Buy Blaupunkt Blue Parade Boghe Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush 2318 2111, 2199 2317 2313 2171 2210 2317 2318 2313 2309 2209 2207 2300 2312 2198, 2238 2192, 2195 2018, 2060, 2248, 2264, 2301, 2308, 2317, 2350, 2368 California Audio Labs 2197 Cambridge Audio 2304 CAT 2306, 2307 CAVS 2146 Centrum 2307 CGV 2304, 2312 Changhong 2222 Cinetec 2313 CineVision 2191, 2215 Clatronic 2308, 2317 Coby 2077, 2124, 2314 Conia 2301 Continental Edison 2313 Crown 2312 C-Tech 2305 Curtis Mathes 2217 CVG 2299 CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216, 2233, 2258 Cytron 2166 Daenyx 2313 Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280, 2299, 2312, 2313, 2326, 2376 Daewoo International 2313 Dalton 2311 Dansai 2303, 2312 Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313 Dayton 2313 DEC 2308 Decca 2312 Denon 2105, 2147, 2197, 2286 Denver 2288, 2308, 2310, 2314 Denzel 2302 Desay 2159 Diamond 2304, 2305 DiamondVision 2179, 2186 Disney 2078, 2088 DK Digital 2257 Dmtech 2226 Dual 2302 Durabrand 2218 DVX 2305 Easy Home 2309 Eclipse 2304 E-Dem 2318 Electrohome 2312 Elin 2312 Elta 2263, 2312, 2315 Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219 Enterprise 2211 vi Enzer Epson ESA Finlux Fintec Fisher Funai Gateway GE Gericom GFM Giec Global Solutions Global Sphere Go Video Goodmans 2302 2165 2219 2304, 2312, 2317 2299 2212 2219 2097 2079, 2206, 2209 2269 2176 2300 2305 2305 2135, 2215 2247, 2289, 2298, 2300, 2308, 2330, 2369 GPX 2177 Gradiente 2197 Graetz 2302 Greenhill 2209 Grundig 2271 Grunkel 2312, 2316 GVG 2299 H&B 2308 H_her 2318 Haaz 2304, 2305 Haier 2172 Harman/Kardon 2125, 2213 HiMAX 2309 Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108, 2302, 2309, 2320, 2366 Hiteker 2208 Home Tech Industries 2318 Hyundai 2316 Ilo 2167 Initial 2167, 2209 Innovation 2228 Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219 Integra 2207 Irradio 2103 iSymphony 2164 JBL 2213 JVC 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2053, 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057, 2070, 2242, 2261, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2278, 2339, 2340, 2341, 2342, 2386, 2387, 2389, 2390, 2391 Jwin 2148 Kansai 2314 Kawasaki 2199 Kennex 2312 Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270 KeyPlug 2312 Kiiro 2312 Kingavon 2308 Kiss 2302 KLH 2199, 2209 Koda 2308 Koss 2095, 2198, 2204 KXD 2309 Landel 2221 Lasonic 2214 Lawson 2305 Lecson 2303 Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317 Lenoxx 2203, 2218 LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips 2080, 2107, 2115, 2116, 2141, 2188, 2211, 2215, 2237, 2239, 2285, 2293, 2295, 2348, 2370 2228 2228 2305 2204 2097, 2121, 2220 2274 2305 2075, 2096, 2178, 2180, 2196, 2205, 2219, 2308 2317 2314 2282 2312 2198, 2296 2149 2312 2228 2078, 2184, 2195 2300, 2304 2228 2206 2228 2312 2317 2167, 2209 2081 2308, 2309 2302 2232 2304 2316 2312 2209 2302 2312 2221 2161 2301 2205, 2290 2097 2150, 2173 2303 2230 2308 2313 2027, 2060 2198, 2204 2308 2305 2015, 2016, 2017, 2036, 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2074, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112, 2120, 2131, 2132, 2197, 2205, 2244, 2245, 2246, 2253, 2254, 2255, 2292, 2321, 2324, 2327, 2328, 2329, 2331, 2383, 2388 2151 2318 2026, 2061, 2062, 2075, 2090, 2094, 2096, 2097, 2103, 2110, 2126, 2180, 2193, 2205, 2231, 2235, 2241, 2251, Phonotrend Pioneer Pointer Polaroid Portland Powerpoint Prima Proceed Proscan Prosonic Protron Provision Pye Qwestar Raite RCA RedStar Regent Reoc Rimax Rio Roadstar Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo ScanMagic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sharp Shinsonic Sigmatek Silva Singer Skymaster 2252, 2256, 2260, 2268, 2282, 2332, 2333, 2343, 2344, 2345, 2367, 2371, 2373, 2380, 2382, 2385 2317 2012, 2013, 2014, 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2113, 2134, 2207, 2230, 2236, 2265, 2266, 2267, 2297, 2322, 2351, 2352, 2353, 2354, 2355, 2356, 2357, 2358, 2359, 2377 2312 2047, 2133, 2185 2312 2313 2174 2208 2206 2299, 2314 2152 2308 2194 2198 2302 2058, 2059, 2071, 2079, 2183, 2199, 2206, 2207, 2209 2310, 2312, 2314 2203 2305 2315 2215 2281, 2308 2313 2153 2200, 2301 2307 2198, 2238 2305 2312 2223 2031, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2082, 2127, 2137, 2138, 2154, 2182, 2197, 2283, 2319, 2325, 2346, 2347, 2349, 2372, 2381 2027, 2195, 2304, 2305, 2312 2139, 2195, 2212, 2374 2232 2312 2226 2305 2243, 2311 2318 2240, 2302, 2305, 2313 2009, 2010, 2084, 2122, 2142, 2143, 2144, 2181, 2190, 2228, 2262, 2375 2167 2309, 2318 2310 2304, 2305 2279, 2305 Skyworth Slim Art SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sontech Sony 2310 2312 2305 2215 2316 2005, 2006, 2007, 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2069, 2072, 2073, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2091, 2092, 2093, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130, 2249, 2250, 2323, 2334, 2335, 2336, 2360, 2361, 2362, 2363, 2364, 2365, 2384 Soundmaster 2305 Soundmax 2305 Spectra 2313 Spectroniq 2155 Standard 2305 Star Cluster 2305 Starmedia 2308, 2318 Sungale 2158 Sunkai 2312 Superscan 2196 Supervision 2305 Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189, 2196, 2219, 2224 Symphonic 2062, 2180 Synn 2305 T.D.E. Systems 2316 Tatung 2083, 2312 TCM 2228, 2379 Teac 2199, 2287, 2301, 2305 Tec 2310 Technics 2197 Technika 2312, 2317 Telefunken 2307 Tensai 2312 Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311 Theta Digital 2207 Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284, 2294 Tokai 2302, 2310 Top Suxess 2318 Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027, 2028, 2029, 2030, 2098, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2136, 2187, 2195, 2205, 2291, 2337, 2338, 2378 TRANScontinents 2313, 2317 Transonic 2317 Trio 2312 Trutech 2160 TruVision 2309 TSM 2318 Umax 2315 United 2317 Urban Concepts 2205 US Logic 2167 Venturer 2199 Viewmaster 2318 Vocopro 2156 VocoStar 2157 Waitec 2318 Welltech 2300 Westinghouse 2109, 2168 Wharfedale 2304, 2305 Woxter Xbox Xlogic XMS Xoro Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith 2315, 2318 2206, 2229 2305, 2312 2312 2300 2097, 2313, 2315 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2011, 2018, 2019, 2036, 2106, 2197, 2273 2302, 2313 2232 2080, 2141, 2205, 2211, 2215 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2115 2089, 2131, 2132 2134 2035, 2127 2142, 2143, 2144 2025 2018 DVR Bush Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Yamaha 2060 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042 2061, 2062 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067 2059 2035 2036 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2140 2162 2192 2135 2108 2080 2103 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057 2107, 2115, 2141, 2188 2121 2037, 2038, 2039, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112 2090, 2096, 2097, 2126, 2193 2067, 2113 2194 2034, 2082, 2138 2027 2139 2022, 2023, 2024, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130 2189 2030, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119 2106 Cable ABC ADB Adelphia 3004, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3037, 3040, 3067, 3080, 3081 3070 3003 Alcatel 3066 Americast 3046 Amstrad 3048, 3068 Antronix 3019, 3020 Archer 3020 Arcon 3048 AT&T 3013 Axis 3048 Bell South 3046 Cable Vision 3014 Cabletenna 3019 Cabletime 3058 Cableview 3005 Clearmaster 3045 ClearMax 3045 Clyde Cablevision 3059 Colour Voice 3022 Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039 Comcrypt 3057 Comtronics 3023 Contec 3024 Coolmax 3045 COX 3006 Cryptovision 3060 Director 3006 Eastern 3025 Everquest 3041 Fidelity 3048 Filmnet 3057 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3061 Filmnet Comcrypt 3061 Finlux 3051 Focus 3044 Foxtel 3068 France Telecom 3054, 3055 Freebox 3069 GC Electronics 3020 GE 3015, 3016 GEC 3059 Gemini 3026, 3041 General Instrument 3006, 3008, 3016, 3039, 3050, 3067, 3075 Goldstar 3042 Gooding 3049 Grundig 3048, 3049 Hamlin 3027, 3028 Hirschmann 3051 Hitachi 3016 HomeChoice 3056 Humax 3001, 3002, 3071 ITT Nokia 3051 Jasco 3041 Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016, 3026, 3037, 3041, 3050, 3064, 3067, 3075 JVC 3049 Kabel Deutschland 3043, 3073, 3074 Macab 3055 Magnavox 3029 Maspro 3049 Matsui 3049 MegaCable 3039 Memorex 3030, 3040 Minerva 3049 Mnet 3057 Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010, 3013, 3039, 3072, 3075 Movie Time Mr Zapp Multichoice Multitech NEC NET Brazil Nokia Noos NSC Oak Pace Palladium Panasonic Paragon Philips 3031, 3063 3055 3057 3045 3018 3007 3051 3055 3031 3024 3011, 3043, 3084 3049 3034, 3036, 3040 3040 3021, 3022, 3029, 3049, 3053, 3054, 3055 Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038, 3042, 3048, 3083, 3084 Popular Mechanics 3044 Proscan 3015, 3016 Pulsar 3040 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3064 Quasar 3040 RadioShack 3041, 3045 RCA 3005, 3036, 3076, 3077 Realistic 3020 Recoton 3044 Regal 3028 Regency 3025 Rembrandt 3016 Runco 3040 Sagem 3055 Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032, 3042 SAT 3048 Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011, 3012, 3013, 3062, 3078, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3083, 3084 Signal 3026, 3041 Signature 3016 Sony 3014, 3047 Sprucer 3036 Standard Component 3033 Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041, 3067 Stargate 3026, 3041 Starquest 3026, 3041 Supercable 3008 Supermax 3045 Tele+1 3057, 3061 Telepiu 3057 Thomson 3000, 3009 TIME WARNER 3006 Tocom 3017 Torx 3067 Toshiba 3040 Tristar 3045 Tudi 3052 Tusa 3026, 3041 TV86 3031 Unika 3019, 3020 United Cable 3037, 3064 Universal 3019, 3020 Universum 3049, 3051 V2 3045 Videoway 3065 View Star 3024, 3029, 3031 vii Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3045 3045 3051, 3054, 3055 3045 3048 3035, 3040, 3046 3044 Sattelite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4138, 4139 4058 4142 4138 4101, 4103 4083, 4084, 4085, 4086, 4108, 4139 Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088 Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103 Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090 Alltech 4139 Alpha 4103 Alpha Digital 4058 Alphastar 4031 Amitronica 4139 Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136, 4139 Anglo 4139 Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090, 4139 Anttron 4083, 4086 Apollo 4083 Armstrong 4089, 4103 Artec 4054 Asat 4101, 4103 ASLF 4139 Astacom 4138 Astra 4089, 4091, 4100, 4137, 4139 Astro 4074, 4086, 4088, 4090, 4093, 4135, 4136, 4137 AudioTon 4086, 4098 Aurora 4140 Austar 4140 Axiel 4138 Axis 4074, 4090, 4091, 4096 Best 4074, 4090 Blaupunkt 4093 Blue Sky 4139 Boca 4089, 4100, 4105, 4139 Boston 4138 Brain Wave 4095 Broadcast 4094 Broco 4139 BSkyB 4113, 4123 BT 4138 Bubu Sat 4139 Bush 4084, 4127 Cambridge 4136 Canal Satellite 4135 Canal+ 4135 CaptiveWorks 4049 Channel Master 4060, 4085 Chaparral 4025 CHEROKEE 4138 Chess 4134, 4139 CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137 Clatronic 4095 CNT 4088 Comag 4000, 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004 Commlink 4087 Comtech 4096 viii Condor Connexions Conrad 4074, 4090, 4137 4074, 4092 4074, 4133, 4136, 4137 Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139 Contec 4096 Coolsat 4050 Cosat 4098 Coship 4063 Crown 4089 Daeryung 4092 Daewoo 4107, 4139 DDC 4085 Delega 4085 Dew 4096 Diamond 4097 Digiality 4137 Digital Stream 4059 DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020, 4021, 4022, 4024, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4041, 4043, 4045, 4057, 4106, 4143, 4144, 4145, 4146, 4147, 4148, 4149, 4150, 4151, 4152, 4153, 4154, 4155, 4156, 4157 Discoverer 4134 Discovery 4138 Diseqc 4138 Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013, 4014, 4019, 4039, 4064 Dishpro 4039, 4064 Distrisat 4103 Ditristrad 4098 DNT 4092, 4101, 4103 Drake 4026 DStv 4140 Dune 4074 Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039, 4064, 4092, 4139 Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089, 4136, 4139 Elap 4138, 4139 Elekta 4088 Elsat 4139 Elta 4074, 4083, 4090, 4098, 4101, 4103 Emanon 4083 Emme Esse 4074, 4090 Engel 4139 Ep Sat 4084 EURIEULT 4077 Eurodec 4102 Europa 4103, 4136, 4137 Europhon 4137 Eurosat 4089 Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090, 4133, 4136, 4137 Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137 Eutelsat 4139 Exator 4083, 4086 Expressvu 4039 Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139 Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132 Fidelity 4136 Finlandia 4084 Finlux 4084 FinnSat 4096, 4102 Flair Mate 4139 Foxtel 4140 Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136 FTEmaximal 4074, 4139 Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090, 4092, 4093, 4101, 4133 Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090, 4091, 4096, 4098, 4133, 4140 GE 4015, 4016, 4061, 4151 General Instrument 4027, 4065 GMI 4089 GOI 4039 Goldbox 4135 GoldStar 4099 Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084 Goodmind 4061 Grandin 4077 Grothusen 4083, 4099 Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093, 4113, 4129, 4136, 4140 Hänsel & Gretel 4137 Hantor 4083, 4095 Hanuri 4088 Hauppauge 4126 Heliocom 4137 Helium 4137 Hinari 4085 Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128, 4136, 4137, 4138 Hisawa 4095 Hisense 4066 Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149, 4153 Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007 Houston 4098 HTS 4039 Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144, 4146, 4150, 4152 Hughes Network Systems 4021 Humax 4051, 4075, 4076, 4110 Huth 4087, 4089, 4094, 4095, 4096, 4098, 4137, 4141 Hypson 4077 Ilo 4066 Imex 4077 Innovation 4090 Insignia 4057 Intertronic 4089 Intervision 4098, 4137 ITT Nokia 4084 Jerrold 4065 Johansson 4095 JOK 4138 JSR 4098 JVC 4011, 4019, 4039, 4079 Kamm 4139 Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103, 4109, 4112, 4120, 4133, 4138, 4139 Kathrein Eurostar 4133 Klap 4138 Konig 4137 Kosmos 4099 KR 4086 Kreiselmeyer 4093 K-SAT 4139 Kyostar 4083 L&S Electronic 4074 Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090, 4100, 4133, 4134, 4137 Lasonic 4062 Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099, 4133, 4137, 4139 Leng 4095 Lennox 4098 Lenson 4136 Lexus 4103 LG 4053, 4057, 4099 Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134, 4139 Lifetec 4090 Lorenzen 4137 Lorraine 4099 Lupus 4074, 4090 Luxor 4136 Lyonnaise 4102 Macab 4102 Magnavox 4045, 4055 Manata 4077, 4138, 4139 Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098, 4138 Marantz 4101 Mascom 4088 Maspro 4084, 4139 Matsui 4138 Max 4137 Mediabox 4135 Mediamarkt 4089 Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136 Medion 4074, 4090, 4139 Medison 4139 Mega 4101, 4103 Memorex 4045 Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083, 4086, 4087, 4088, 4139 Metz 4093 Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139 Micro Technology 4139 MicroGem 4056 Micromaxx 4074, 4090 Microstar 4090 Microtec 4139 Minerva 4093 Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152 Mitsumi 4100 Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101, 4103, 4139 Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010, 4065 Multichoice 4140 Multitec 4134 Muratto 4099 Mysat 4139 Navex 4095 Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136, 4137, 4139 Neusat 4139 Next Level 4065 NextWave 4141 Nikko 4089, 4139 Nokia 4084, 4122 Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085, 4088, 4102 Nova 4140 Novis 4095 Oceanic 4097 Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096 Okano 4089 Optex 4098 Optus 4135, 4140, 4141 Orbitech OSat Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat PCT Philco Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pioneer Polsat Predki Premiere Priesner Primestar Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton Provision Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team 4083, 4134, 4135, 4136 4086 4093 4084, 4093, 4113, 4121, 4125, 4138 4097 4138 4085 4089, 4136 4134, 4136 4140 4043, 4044, 4046, 4084, 4113, 4118, 4143, 4148 4084, 4137 4047 4138 4045 4060 4055 4021, 4022, 4045, 4084, 4101, 4103, 4111, 4115, 4135, 4138, 4150, 4152, 4153, 4155, 4156 4096 4084, 4087, 4098 4124, 4135 4102 4095 4098, 4135 4089 4030 4138 4084 4085, 4087 4015, 4016, 4040, 4151 4097 4066 4088 4074, 4085, 4087, 4090, 4138 4093, 4133, 4137 4102 4065 4101, 4103 4092, 4119 4086 4015, 4016, 4034, 4035, 4036, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4151, 4157 4028 4091 4074, 4090 4087, 4101, 4103 4139 4077 4074, 4139 4088, 4133, 4137, 4138 4084 4069, 4102 4096 4018, 4021, 4023, 4041, 4042, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4114, 4150, 4154 4085, 4136 4141 4083, 4086, 4088, 4095, 4099, 4136 4139 Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG 4094, 4137 4139 4074 4094 4094 4134 4090, 4134, 4138 4097, 4134, 4137 4133 4089, 4091, 4092 4074, 4083, 4090, 4095 Seleco 4098 Servi Sat 4077, 4139 Siemens 4093 Silva 4099 Skantin 4139 Skardin 4091 Skinsat 4136 SKR 4139 Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087, 4134, 4139 Skymax 4101, 4103 SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137, 4139 Skyvision 4098 SM Electronic 4134, 4139 Smart 4133, 4139 Sony 4017, 4020, 4135 SR 4089, 4100 Star Choice 4065 Starland 4139 Starring 4095 Start Trak 4083 Strong 4074, 4083, 4086, 4090, 4099, 4140 STS 4033 STVI 4077 Sumida 4089 Sunny Sound 4074 Sunsat 4139 Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100 Supermax 4141 Tandberg 4102 Tandy 4086 Tantec 4084 TCM 4090 Techniland 4094 TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073, 4092, 4103, 4116, 4117, 4134, 4135, 4136 Technology 4140 Technosat 4141 Technowelt 4137 Teco 4089, 4100 Telanor 4085 Telasat 4133, 4137 Telecom 4139 Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138 Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092, 4136, 4137 Telemaster 4088 Telesat 4137 Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136 Televes 4084, 4136 Telewire 4098 Tempo 4141 Tevion 4090, 4139 Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102, 4104, 4130, 4133, 4135, 4137, 4138, 4139 Thorens 4097 Thorn 4084 Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac 4058 4150 4103 4084, 4094, 4098, 4136, 4139 4144, 4152, 4153 4099 4136 4093, 4133, 4136, 4139 4139 4132 4077, 4139 4140 4134 4020 4029, 4045 4089, 4096, 4103 4095 4093, 4133, 4137 4066 4093 4074 4101, 4103 4048 4095, 4098, 4138, 4139 4065 4083 4134 4134, 4136 4084 4084 4095 4084, 4092, 4093, 4136, 4137 4088 4138 4074 4139 4074, 4088, 4090, 4131, 4133 4052, 4057, 4145 4086 CD Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recoder Yamaha 5001 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 Tape Yamaha 5005, 5006 Tuner Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 USB Yamaha 5012, 5021 DOCK Yamaha 5011, 5022 LD Yamaha 2002 ix © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in China WR90290 UCTKEF HTR-6250/6240 The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual. Les lettres dans les cercles et les numéros dans les carrés correspondent à ceux du mode d'emploi. Le lettere cerchiate e i numeri nei quadratini corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni. Las letras enmarcadas en un círculo y los números enmarcados en un cuadrado se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones. Буквы в кружочках и цифры в квадратиках соответствуют таковым в инструкции по эксплуатации. 圆圈内的字母和正方形内的数字与说明书内的同类字母和数字相对应。 원 안의 문자들과 사각형 안의 숫자들은 사용자 설명서에 있는 것들과 일치합니다 . ■ Front panel/Face avant/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널 U T D E F G H P VOLUME HDMI THROUGH INFO l MEMORY PRESET h l AM FM TUNING h SCENE BD/DVD PHONES TONE CONTROL PROGRAM l STANDBY /ON CD STRAIGHT DIRECT RADIO INPUT l h VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A TV VIDEO B C J K LM N O I Q AUDIO R PORTABLE S ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Telecomando/Mando a distancia/ Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 / 리모콘 a b CODE SET TRANSMIT c d POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP e HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 f AV 1 g 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER h FM AM i INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE j STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE k l BD DVD TV CD SETUP n o VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY TOP MENU s m OPTION RETURN r RADIO MENU MUTE q p REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT t POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE Printed in China WQ95610